132 files changed, 3776 insertions, 1478 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 6de71308a906..438277800103 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -89,8 +89,6 @@ cciss.txt
         - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
 cdrom/
         - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has.
-cli-sti-removal.txt
-        - cli()/sti() removal guide.
 computone.txt
         - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver.
 connector/
@@ -161,8 +159,6 @@ hayes-esp.txt
         - info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver.
 highuid.txt
         - notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
-hpet.txt
-        - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux.
 timers/
         - info on the timer related topics
 hw_random.txt
@@ -253,8 +249,6 @@ mono.txt
         - how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC.
 moxa-smartio
         - file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver.
-mtrr.txt
-        - how to use PPro Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance.
 mutex-design.txt
         - info on the generic mutex subsystem.
 namespaces/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79a4a75b2d2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../state
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                state. This holds the regulator output state.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'unknown'
+
+                'enabled' means the regulator output is ON and is supplying
+                power to the system.
+
+                'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not
+                supplying power to the system..
+
+                'unknown' means software cannot determine the state.
+
+                NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts
+                and microamps to determine regulator output levels.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../type
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                type. This holds the regulator type.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'voltage'
+                'current'
+                'unknown'
+
+                'voltage' means the regulator output voltage can be controlled
+                by software.
+
+                'current' means the regulator output current limit can be
+                controlled by software.
+
+                'unknown' means software cannot control either voltage or
+                current limit.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
+                measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts).
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
+                setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps).
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output current level as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
+
+                The opmode value can be one of the following strings:
+
+                'fast'
+                'normal'
+                'idle'
+                'standby'
+                'unknown'
+
+                The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h
+
+                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
+                output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of
+                whether the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
+                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
+                microamps.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
+                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
+                microamps.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
+                the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by
+                platform code.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that
+                have called regulator_enable() on this regulator.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
+                current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer
+                devices.
+
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../parent
+Date:           April 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent.
+                This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to memory.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to disk.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
+                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
+                the system is suspended to standby.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
+                memory.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
+                standby.
+
+                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by
+                platform code.
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
+                when suspended to memory.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
+                when suspended to disk.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
+
+What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
+Date:           May 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.26
+Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+Description:
+                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
+                state when suspended to standby.
+
+                This will be one of the following strings:
+
+                'enabled'
+                'disabled'
+                'not defined'
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4573fd4b7876
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+What:           /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/
+Date:           August 2008
+Contact:        Russ Anderson <rja@sgi.com>
+Description:
+                The /sys/firmware/sgi_uv directory contains information
+                about the SGI UV platform.
+
+                Under that directory are a number of files:
+
+                        partition_id
+                        coherence_id
+
+                The partition_id entry contains the partition id.
+                SGI UV systems can be partitioned into multiple physical
+                machines, which each partition running a unique copy
+                of the operating system.  Each partition will have a unique
+                partition id.  To display the partition id, use the command:
+
+                        cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/partition_id
+
+                The coherence_id entry contains the coherence id.
+                A partitioned SGI UV system can have one or more coherence
+                domain.  The coherence id indicates which coherence domain
+                this partition is in.  To display the coherence id, use the
+                command:
+
+                        cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/coherence_id
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8aab8092ad35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+What:           /sys/class/gpio/
+Date:           July 2008
+KernelVersion:  2.6.27
+Contact:        David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:
+
+  As a Kconfig option, individual GPIO signals may be accessed from
+  userspace.  GPIOs are only made available to userspace by an explicit
+  "export" operation.  If a given GPIO is not claimed for use by
+  kernel code, it may be exported by userspace (and unexported later).
+  Kernel code may export it for complete or partial access.
+
+  GPIOs are identified as they are inside the kernel, using integers in
+  the range 0..INT_MAX.  See Documentation/gpio.txt for more information.
+
+    /sys/class/gpio
+        /export ... asks the kernel to export a GPIO to userspace
+        /unexport ... to return a GPIO to the kernel
+        /gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N
+            /value ... always readable, writes fail for input GPIOs
+            /direction ... r/w as: in, out (default low); write: high, low
+        /gpiochipN ... for each gpiochip; #N is its first GPIO
+            /base ... (r/o) same as N
+            /label ... (r/o) descriptive, not necessarily unique
+            /ngpio ... (r/o) number of GPIOs; numbered N to N + (ngpio - 1)
+
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index d8b63d164e41..b8e86460046e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this:
         int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
         struct scatterlist *sg;
 
-        for (i = 0, sg = sglist; i < count; i++, sg++) {
+        for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) {
                 hw_address[i] = sg_dma_address(sg);
                 hw_len[i] = sg_dma_len(sg);
         }
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
index b463ecd0c7ce..c74fec8c2351 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
@@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ failure can be determined by:
         dma_addr_t dma_handle;
 
         dma_handle = pci_map_single(pdev, addr, size, direction);
-        if (pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_handle)) {
+        if (pci_dma_mapping_error(pdev, dma_handle)) {
                 /*
                  * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
                  * delay and try again later or
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
index 0eb0d027eb32..1615350b7b53 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
             kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
             gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
             genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
-            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml
+            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
@@ -102,6 +102,13 @@ C-procfs-example = procfs_example.xml
 C-procfs-example2 = $(addprefix $(obj)/,$(C-procfs-example))
 $(obj)/procfs-guide.xml: $(C-procfs-example2)
 
+# List of programs to build
+##oops, this is a kernel module::hostprogs-y := procfs_example
+obj-m += procfs_example.o
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
 notfoundtemplate = echo "*** You have to install docbook-utils or xmlto ***"; \
                    exit 1
 db2xtemplate = db2TYPE -o $(dir $@) $<
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
index b7b1482f6e04..9d0058e788e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
@@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
   <chapter id="security">
      <title>Security Framework</title>
 !Isecurity/security.c
+!Esecurity/inode.c
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="audit">
@@ -364,6 +365,10 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
 !Eblock/blk-barrier.c
 !Eblock/blk-tag.c
 !Iblock/blk-tag.c
+!Eblock/blk-integrity.c
+!Iblock/blktrace.c
+!Iblock/genhd.c
+!Eblock/genhd.c
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="chrdev">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
index e8acd1f03456..372dec20c8da 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
@@ -98,6 +98,24 @@
     "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb".
     </para>
     <para>
+    It is advised, but not required that you turn on the
+    CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option.  This option inserts code to
+    into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in
+    registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a
+    debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces
+    while debugging the kernel.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA, you should consider turning it off.  This
+    option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it
+    marks certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only.
+    If kgdb supports it for the architecture you are using, you can
+    use hardware breakpoints if you desire to run with the
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA option turned on, else you need to turn off
+    this option.
+    </para>
+    <para>
     Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
     host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires a KGDB
     I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
index b651e0a4b1c0..77c3c202991b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl
@@ -145,7 +145,6 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
         this though and the recommendation to allow only a single
         interface in STA mode at first!
       </para>
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_types
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_init_conf
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_if_conf
     </chapter>
@@ -177,8 +176,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
         <title>functions/definitions</title>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_control
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_flags
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status
@@ -189,12 +187,11 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_queues
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
       </sect1>
     </chapter>
 
@@ -230,8 +227,7 @@ usage should require reading the full document.
       <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title>
       <para>TBD</para>
 !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats_data
-!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue
+!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_stats
     </chapter>
 
     <chapter id="AP">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
index 7064084c1c5e..2f3de0fb8365 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
@@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ static int __init init_procfs_example(void)
         return 0;
 
 no_symlink:
-        remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir);
-no_tty:
         remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir);
 no_bar:
         remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir);
@@ -206,7 +204,6 @@ out:
 static void __exit cleanup_procfs_example(void)
 {
         remove_proc_entry("jiffies_too", example_dir);
-        remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir);
         remove_proc_entry("jiffies", example_dir);
@@ -222,3 +219,4 @@ module_exit(cleanup_procfs_example);
 
 MODULE_AUTHOR("Erik Mouw");
 MODULE_DESCRIPTION("procfs examples");
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
index 4acc73240a6d..95bfc12e5439 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
       the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles
       of Operation.
     </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/cio.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cio.h
     </sect1>
     <sect1 id="ccwdev">
      <title>ccw devices</title>
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
       ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions
       or strange side effects may happen.
     </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwdev.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwdev.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c
     </sect1>
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
         measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem
         for each channel attached device.
   </para>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/cmb.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cmb.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c
     </sect1>
   </chapter>
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   </para>
    <sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices">
     <title>ccw group devices</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwgroup.h
+!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwgroup.h
 !Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c
    </sect1>
   </chapter>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c3dc4c69dd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+        "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="sh-drivers">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>SuperH Interfaces Guide</title>
+  
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Paul</firstname>
+    <surname>Mundt</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>lethal@linux-sh.org</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Paul Mundt</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder>
+  </copyright>
+
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+     License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+     MA 02111-1307 USA
+   </para>
+      
+   <para>
+     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+     distribution of Linux.
+   </para>
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <chapter id="mm">
+    <title>Memory Management</title>
+    <sect1 id="sh4">
+    <title>SH-4</title>
+      <sect2 id="sq">
+        <title>Store Queue API</title>
+!Earch/sh/kernel/cpu/sh4/sq.c
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="sh5">
+      <title>SH-5</title>
+      <sect2 id="tlb">
+        <title>TLB Interfaces</title>
+!Iarch/sh/mm/tlb-sh5.c
+!Iarch/sh/include/asm/tlb_64.h
+      </sect2>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="clk">
+    <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title>
+!Iarch/sh/include/asm/clock.h
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="mach">
+    <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title>
+    <sect1 id="dreamcast">
+      <title>mach-dreamcast</title>
+!Iarch/sh/boards/mach-dreamcast/rtc.c
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="x3proto">
+      <title>mach-x3proto</title>
+!Earch/sh/boards/mach-x3proto/ilsel.c
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="busses">
+    <title>Busses</title>
+    <sect1 id="superhyway">
+      <title>SuperHyway</title>
+!Edrivers/sh/superhyway/superhyway.c
+    </sect1>
+
+    <sect1 id="maple">
+      <title>Maple</title>
+!Edrivers/sh/maple/maple.c
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
index 89817795e668..0bc25949b668 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
@@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ static struct video_buffer capture_fb;
 
   <chapter id="pubfunctions">
      <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
-!Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c
+!Edrivers/media/video/v4l2-dev.c
   </chapter>
 
 </book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
index 42c75ba71ba2..a42a8a4c7689 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
@@ -69,12 +69,6 @@
         device to be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous 
         controller is a project for Linux post the 2.4 release
   </para>
-  <para>
-        The support code handles most common card configurations and
-        supports running both Cisco HDLC and Synchronous PPP. With extra
-        glue the frame relay and X.25 protocols can also be used with this
-        driver.
-  </para>
   </chapter>
   
   <chapter id="Driver_Modes">
@@ -179,35 +173,27 @@
   <para>
         If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver,
         then you need to attach a network device to each channel that is
-        present and in use. In addition to use the SyncPPP and Cisco HDLC
+        present and in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC
         you need to follow some additional plumbing rules. They may seem 
         complex but a look at the example hostess_sv11 driver should
         reassure you.
   </para>
   <para>
         The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by
-        the netdevice field of each channel. The dev-&gt; priv field of the
+        the netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-&gt; priv field of the
         network device points to your private data - you will need to be
-        able to find your ppp device from this. In addition to use the
-        sync ppp layer the private data must start with a void * pointer
-        to the syncppp structures.
+        able to find your private data from this.
   </para>
   <para>
         The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to
         create a structure holding the Z8530 device definition and
-        put that and the syncppp pointer into the private field of
-        the network device. The network device fields of the channels
-        then point back to the network devices. The ppp_device can also
-        be put in the private structure conveniently.
+        put that into the private field of the network device. The
+        network device fields of the channels then point back to the
+        network devices.
   </para>
   <para>
-        If you wish to use the synchronous ppp then you need to attach
-        the syncppp layer to the network device. You should do this before
-        you register the network device. The
-        <function>sppp_attach</function> requires that the first void *
-        pointer in your private data is pointing to an empty struct
-        ppp_device. The function fills in the initial data for the
-        ppp/hdlc layer.
+        If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register
+        the HDLC device.
   </para>
   <para>
         Before you register your network device you will also need to
@@ -314,10 +300,10 @@
         buffer in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The
         caller must provide the entire packet with the exception of the
         bitstuffing and CRC. This is normally done by the caller via
-        the syncppp interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been 
-        queued and non zero values  for queue full. If the function accepts 
-        the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller 
-        should not free it. 
+        the generic HDLC interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been
+        queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts
+        the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller
+        should not free it.
   </para>
   <para>
         The function <function>z8530_get_stats</function> returns a pointer
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index c2371c5a98f9..48a3955f05fc 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ documentation files are also added which explain how to use the feature.
 When a kernel change causes the interface that the kernel exposes to
 userspace to change, it is recommended that you send the information or
 a patch to the manual pages explaining the change to the manual pages
-maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com.
+maintainer at mtk.manpages@gmail.com, and CC the list
+linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
 
 Here is a list of files that are in the kernel source tree that are
 required reading:
diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..94b945733534
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
+        filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \
+        pcmcia/ spi/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
index cf5562cbe356..6e253407b3dc 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
                 number of updates per grace period.
 
 9.      All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
-        rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
+        rcu_dereference(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),
         list_for_each_continue_rcu(), and list_for_each_safe_rcu(),
         must be either within an RCU read-side critical section or
         must be protected by appropriate update-side locks.  RCU
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
index 451de2ad8329..4202ad093130 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ release_referenced()			delete()
                                         }
 
 If this list/array is made lock free using RCU as in changing the
-write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock
-in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in
-search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which
+write_lock() in add() and delete() to spin_lock() and changing read_lock()
+in search_and_reference() to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_inc() in
+search_and_reference() could potentially hold reference to an element which
 has already been deleted from the list/array.  Use atomic_inc_not_zero()
 in this scenario as follows:
 
@@ -40,20 +40,20 @@ add()					search_and_reference()
 {                                       {
     alloc_object                            rcu_read_lock();
     ...                                     search_for_element
-    atomic_set(&el->rc, 1);                 if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) {
-    write_lock(&list_lock);                     rcu_read_unlock();
+    atomic_set(&el->rc, 1);                 if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) {
+    spin_lock(&list_lock);                      rcu_read_unlock();
                                                 return FAIL;
     add_element                             }
     ...                                     ...
-    write_unlock(&list_lock);               rcu_read_unlock();
+    spin_unlock(&list_lock);                rcu_read_unlock();
 }                                       }
 3.                                      4.
 release_referenced()                    delete()
 {                                       {
-    ...                                     write_lock(&list_lock);
+    ...                                     spin_lock(&list_lock);
     if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))       ...
         call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);       delete_element
-    ...                                     write_unlock(&list_lock);
+    ...                                     spin_unlock(&list_lock);
 }                                           ...
                                             if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
                                                 call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
index e04d643a9f57..96170824a717 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
@@ -786,8 +786,6 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal:
         list_for_each_entry_rcu
         hlist_for_each_entry_rcu
 
-        list_for_each_rcu               (to be deprecated in favor of
-                                         list_for_each_entry_rcu)
         list_for_each_continue_rcu      (to be deprecated in favor of new
                                          list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu)
 
diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/SELinux.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07eae00f3314
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/SELinux.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want
+to use the distro-provided policies, or install the
+latest reference policy release from
+        http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy
+
+However, if you want to install a dummy policy for
+testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under
+scripts/selinux.  Note that this requires the selinux
+userspace to be installed - in particular you will
+need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and
+fixfiles to label the filesystem.
+
+        1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled.
+        2. Type 'make' to compile mdp.
+        3. Make sure that you are not running with
+           SELinux enabled and a real policy.  If
+           you are, reboot with selinux disabled
+           before continuing.
+        4. Run install_policy.sh:
+                cd scripts/selinux
+                sh install_policy.sh
+
+Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your
+kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type.
+It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to
+dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy
+as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem.
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
index da10e0714241..21f0795af20f 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
+++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
@@ -67,6 +67,8 @@ kernel patches.
 
 19: All new userspace interfaces are documented in Documentation/ABI/.
     See Documentation/ABI/README for more information.
+    Patches that change userspace interfaces should be CCed to
+    linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
 
 20: Check that it all passes `make headers_check'.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/Makefile b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..31929eb875b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := getdelays
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_getdelays.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index 3f7755f3963f..cc49400b4af8 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -201,13 +201,19 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
                "RECLAIM  %12s%15s\n"
                "      %15llu%15llu\n",
                "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
-               t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
-               t->cpu_delay_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_real_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->cpu_delay_total,
                "count", "delay total",
-               t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total,
-               "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total,
+               (unsigned long long)t->blkio_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->blkio_delay_total,
                "count", "delay total",
-               t->freepages_count, t->freepages_delay_total);
+               (unsigned long long)t->swapin_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->swapin_delay_total,
+               "count", "delay total",
+               (unsigned long long)t->freepages_count,
+               (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total);
 }
 
 void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)
@@ -215,14 +221,17 @@ void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)
         printf("\n\nTask   %15s%15s\n"
                "       %15llu%15llu\n",
                "voluntary", "nonvoluntary",
-               t->nvcsw, t->nivcsw);
+               (unsigned long long)t->nvcsw, (unsigned long long)t->nivcsw);
 }
 
 void print_cgroupstats(struct cgroupstats *c)
 {
         printf("sleeping %llu, blocked %llu, running %llu, stopped %llu, "
-                "uninterruptible %llu\n", c->nr_sleeping, c->nr_io_wait,
-                c->nr_running, c->nr_stopped, c->nr_uninterruptible);
+                "uninterruptible %llu\n", (unsigned long long)c->nr_sleeping,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_io_wait,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_running,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_stopped,
+                (unsigned long long)c->nr_uninterruptible);
 }
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
index 43edb4ecf27d..72fbcc4fcab0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
+++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips:
 - Flash access (MTD/JFFS)
 - I2C through GPIO on IXP42x
 - GPIO for input/output/interrupts 
-  See include/asm-arm/arch-ixp4xx/platform.h for access functions.
+  See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions.
 - Timers (watchdog, OS)
 
 The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
index c202ed35d7d6..f09ab1b90ef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ So, what's changed?
    be re-checked for pending events.  (see the Neponset IRQ handler for
    details).
 
-7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is include/asm-arm/arch-*/irq.h
+7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h
 
 Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are
 hardware based.  Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/README
index 9b9c8226fdc4..d98783fbe0c7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/README
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Machine/Platform support
   To this end, we now have arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE) directories which are
   designed to house the non-driver files for a particular machine (eg, PCI,
   memory management, architecture definitions etc).  For all future
-  machines, there should be a corresponding include/asm-arm/arch-$(MACHINE)
+  machines, there should be a corresponding arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE)/include/mach
   directory.
 
 
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Kernel entry (head.S)
   class typically based around one or more system on a chip devices, and
   acts as a natural container around the actual implementations.  These
   classes are given directories - arch/arm/mach-<class> and
-  include/asm-arm/arch-<class> - which contain the source files to
+  arch/arm/mach-<class> - which contain the source files to/include/mach
   support the machine class.  This directories also contain any machine
   specific supporting code.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
index 8caea8c237ee..ea7ccfc4b274 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
@@ -13,16 +13,31 @@ Introduction
   data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list.
 
 
+GPIOLIB
+-------
+
+  With the event of the GPIOLIB in drivers/gpio, support for some
+  of the GPIO functions such as reading and writing a pin will
+  be removed in favour of this common access method.
+
+  Once all the extant drivers have been converted, the functions
+  listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated
+  in the near future).
+
+  - s3c2410_gpio_getpin
+  - s3c2410_gpio_setpin
+
+
 Headers
 -------
 
-  See include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/regs-gpio.h for the list
+  See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list
   of GPIO pins, and the configuration values for them. This
-  is included by using #include <asm/arch/regs-gpio.h>
+  is included by using #include <mach/regs-gpio.h>
 
   The GPIO management functions are defined in the hardware
-  header include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/hardware.h which can be
-  included by #include <asm/arch/hardware.h>
+  header arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/hardware.h which can be
+  included by #include <mach/hardware.h>
 
   A useful amount of documentation can be found in the hardware
   header on how the GPIO functions (and others) work.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
index d04e1e30c47f..cff6227b4484 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
@@ -8,9 +8,10 @@ Introduction
 
   The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported
   by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410,
-  S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported.
+  S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442 and S3C2443 devices are supported.
+
+  Support for the S3C2400 and S3C24A0 series are in progress.
 
-  Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress.
 
 Configuration
 -------------
@@ -36,7 +37,23 @@ Layout
   in arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 and S3C2440 in arch/arm/mach-s3c2440
 
   Register, kernel and platform data definitions are held in the
-  include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410 directory.
+  arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 directory./include/mach
+
+arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx:
+
+  Files in here are either common to all the s3c24xx family,
+  or are common to only some of them with names to indicate this
+  status. The files that are not common to all are generally named
+  with the initial cpu they support in the series to ensure a short
+  name without any possibility of confusion with newer devices.
+
+  As an example, initially s3c244x would cover s3c2440 and s3c2442, but
+  with the s3c2443 which does not share many of the same drivers in
+  this directory, the name becomes invalid. We stick to s3c2440-<x>
+  to indicate a driver that is s3c2440 and s3c2442 compatible.
+
+  This does mean that to find the status of any given SoC, a number
+  of directories may need to be searched.
 
 
 Machines
@@ -159,6 +176,17 @@ NAND
   For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
 
 
+SD/MMC
+------
+
+  The SD/MMC hardware pre S3C2443 is supported in the current
+  kernel, the driver is drivers/mmc/host/s3cmci.c and supports
+  1 and 4 bit SD or MMC cards.
+
+  The SDIO behaviour of this driver has not been fully tested. There is no
+  current support for hardware SDIO interrupts.
+
+
 Serial
 ------
 
@@ -178,6 +206,9 @@ GPIO
   The core contains support for manipulating the GPIO, see the
   documentation in GPIO.txt in the same directory as this file.
 
+  Newer kernels carry GPIOLIB, and support is being moved towards
+  this with some of the older support in line to be removed.
+
 
 Clock Management
 ----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
index b93b68e2b143..67671eba4231 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Board Support
 Platform Data
 -------------
 
-  See linux/include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/usb-control.h for the
+  See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/usb-control.h for the
   descriptions of the platform device data. An implementation
   can be found in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/usb-simtec.c .
 
diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..51fe23332c81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := cfag12864b-example
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_cfag12864b-example.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 84f6a484ae9a..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/blackfin/kgdb.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
-                        A Simple Guide to Configure KGDB
-
-                        Sonic Zhang <sonic.zhang@analog.com>
-                                Aug. 24th 2006
-
-
-This KGDB patch enables the kernel developer to do source level debugging on
-the kernel for the Blackfin architecture.  The debugging works over either the
-ethernet interface or one of the uarts.  Both software breakpoints and
-hardware breakpoints are supported in this version.
-http://docs.blackfin.uclinux.org/doku.php?id=kgdb
-
-
-2 known issues:
-1. This bug:
-       http://blackfin.uclinux.org/tracker/index.php?func=detail&aid=544&group_id=18&atid=145
-   The GDB client for Blackfin uClinux causes incorrect values of local
-   variables to be displayed when the user breaks the running of kernel in GDB.
-2. Because of a hardware bug in Blackfin 533 v1.0.3:
-       05000067 - Watchpoints (Hardware Breakpoints) are not supported
-   Hardware breakpoints cannot be set properly.
-
-
-Debug over Ethernet:
- 
-1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
-   can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
-
-2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel.  Select the menuconfig option under
-   "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
-   With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and 
-   "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
-
-3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (Ethernet)".  Add "kgdboe=@target-IP/,@host-IP/" to
-   the option "Compiled-in Kernel Boot Parameter" under "Kernel hacking".
-
-4. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image.
-
-5. Configure the IP "/> ifconfig eth0 target-IP"
-
-6. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
-
-7. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote udp:target-IP:6443".
-
-8. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
-
-9. Continue "(gdb) c".
-
-10. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
-
-11. Breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
-
-12. Display local variables and function paramters.
-    (*) This operation gives wrong results, see known issue 1.
-
-13. Single stepping "(gdb) si".
-
-14. Remove breakpoint 1. "(gdb) del 1"
-
-15. Set hardware breakpoint "(gdb) hbreak sys_open".
-
-16. Continue "(gdb) c".
-
-17. Run ls in the target console "/> ls".
-
-18. Hardware breakpoint hits. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(...".
-    (*) This hardware breakpoint will not be hit, see known issue 2.
-
-19. Continue "(gdb) c".
-
-20. Interrupt the target in GDB "Ctrl+C".
-
-21. Detach from the target "(gdb) detach".
-
-22. Exit GDB "(gdb) quit".
-
-
-Debug over the UART:
-
-1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
-   can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
-
-2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel.  Select the menuconfig option under
-   "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
-   With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and 
-   "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
-
-3. Select option "KGDB: connect over (UART)".  Set "KGDB: UART port number" to be
-   a different one from the console.  Don't forget to change the mode of
-   blackfin serial driver to PIO.  Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
- 
-4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
-   "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" 
-
-5. Compile kernel.
-
-6. Connect minicom to the serial port of the console and boot the kernel image.
-
-7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
-
-8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
-
-9. Connect to the target on the second serial port "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS1".
-
-10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
-
-11. Continue "(gdb) c". 
-
-12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". 
-
-13. A breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
-
-14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet. 
-
-
-Debug over the same UART as console:
-
-1. Compile and install the cross platform version of gdb for blackfin, which
-   can be found at $(BINROOT)/bfin-elf-gdb.
-
-2. Apply this patch to the 2.6.x kernel.  Select the menuconfig option under
-   "Kernel hacking" -> "Kernel debugging" -> "KGDB: kernel debug with remote gdb".
-   With this selected, option "Full Symbolic/Source Debugging support" and 
-   "Compile the kernel with frame pointers" are also selected.
-
-3. Select option "KGDB: connect over UART".  Set "KGDB: UART port number" to console.
-   Don't forget to change the mode of blackfin serial driver to PIO.
-   Otherwise kgdb works incorrectly on UART.
- 
-4. If you want connect to kgdb when the kernel boots, enable
-   "KGDB: Wait for gdb connection early" 
-
-5. Connect minicom to the serial port and boot the kernel image. 
-
-6. (Optional) Ask target to wait for gdb connection by entering Ctrl+A. In minicom, you should enter Ctrl+A+A.
-
-7. Start GDB client "bfin-elf-gdb vmlinux".
-
-8. Set the baud rate in GDB "(gdb) set remotebaud 57600".
-
-9. Connect to the target "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
-
-10. Set software breakpoint "(gdb) break sys_open".
-
-11. Continue "(gdb) c". Then enter Ctrl+C twice to stop GDB connection.
-
-12. Run ls in the target console "/> ls". Dummy string can be seen on the console.
-
-13. Then connect the gdb to target again. "(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0".
-    Now you will find a breakpoint is hit. "Breakpoint 1: sys_open(..."
-
-14. All other operations are the same as that in KGDB over Ethernet.  The only
-    difference is that after continue command in GDB, please stop GDB
-    connection by 2 "Ctrl+C"s and connect again after breakpoints are hit or
-    Ctrl+A is entered.
diff --git a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
index c23cab13c3d1..72576769e0f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt
@@ -30,12 +30,18 @@ write_expire	(in ms)
 Similar to read_expire mentioned above, but for writes.
 
 
-fifo_batch
+fifo_batch      (number of requests)
 ----------
 
-When a read request expires its deadline, we must move some requests from
-the sorted io scheduler list to the block device dispatch queue. fifo_batch
-controls how many requests we move.
+Requests are grouped into ``batches'' of a particular data direction (read or
+write) which are serviced in increasing sector order.  To limit extra seeking,
+deadline expiries are only checked between batches.  fifo_batch controls the
+maximum number of requests per batch.
+
+This parameter tunes the balance between per-request latency and aggregate
+throughput.  When low latency is the primary concern, smaller is better (where
+a value of 1 yields first-come first-served behaviour).  Increasing fifo_batch
+generally improves throughput, at the cost of latency variation.
 
 
 writes_starved  (number of dispatches)
diff --git a/Documentation/cciss.txt b/Documentation/cciss.txt
index 63e59b8847c5..8244c6442faa 100644
--- a/Documentation/cciss.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cciss.txt
@@ -112,27 +112,18 @@ Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives
 
 Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats.
 The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus
-have been made, in addition to and prior to informing the SCSI 
-mid layer.  This may be done via the /proc filesystem.  For example:
+have been made.  This may be done via the /proc filesystem.
+For example:
 
         echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1
 
-This causes the adapter to query the adapter about changes to the 
-physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the 
+This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the
+physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the
 driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices
 or medium changers.  The driver will output messages indicating what 
 devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and 
-lun used to address the device.  Once this is done, the SCSI mid layer 
-can be informed of changes to the virtual SCSI bus which the driver 
-presents to it in the usual way. For example: 
-
-        echo scsi add-single-device 3 2 1 0 > /proc/scsi/scsi
- 
-to add a device on controller 3, bus 2, target 1, lun 0.   Note that
-the driver makes an effort to preserve the devices positions
-in the virtual SCSI bus, so if you are only moving tape drives 
-around on the same adapter and not adding or removing tape drives 
-from the adapter, informing the SCSI mid layer may not be necessary.
+lun used to address the device.  It then notifies the SCSI mid layer
+of these changes.
 
 Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries 
 contains a number in addition to the driver name.  (E.g. "cciss0" 
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
index 91c0dcc6fa5c..2c558cd6c1ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
@@ -145,8 +145,7 @@ useful for reading photocds.
 
 To play an audio CD, you should first unmount and remove any data
 CDROM.  Any of the CDROM player programs should then work (workman,
-workbone, cdplayer, etc.).  Lacking anything else, you could use the
-cdtester program in Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd.
+workbone, cdplayer, etc.).
 
 On a few drives, you can read digital audio directly using a program
 such as cdda2wav.  The only types of drive which I've heard support
diff --git a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt b/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 60932b02fcb3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-
-#### cli()/sti() removal guide, started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
-
-
-as of 2.5.28, five popular macros have been removed on SMP, and
-are being phased out on UP:
-
- cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags), save_flags_cli(flags), restore_flags(flags)
-
-until now it was possible to protect driver code against interrupt
-handlers via a cli(), but from now on other, more lightweight methods
-have to be used for synchronization, such as spinlocks or semaphores.
-
-for example, driver code that used to do something like:
-
-        struct driver_data;
-
-        irq_handler (...)
-        {
-                ....
-                driver_data.finish = 1;
-                driver_data.new_work = 0;
-                ....
-        }
-
-        ...
-
-        ioctl_func (...)
-        {
-                ...
-                cli();
-                ...
-                driver_data.finish = 0;
-                driver_data.new_work = 2;
-                ...
-                sti();
-                ...
-        }
-
-was SMP-correct because the cli() function ensured that no
-interrupt handler (amongst them the above irq_handler()) function
-would execute while the cli()-ed section is executing.
-
-but from now on a more direct method of locking has to be used:
-
-        DEFINE_SPINLOCK(driver_lock);
-        struct driver_data;
-
-        irq_handler (...)
-        {
-                unsigned long flags;
-                ....
-                spin_lock_irqsave(&driver_lock, flags);
-                ....
-                driver_data.finish = 1;
-                driver_data.new_work = 0;
-                ....
-                spin_unlock_irqrestore(&driver_lock, flags);
-                ....
-        }
-
-        ...
-
-        ioctl_func (...)
-        {
-                ...
-                spin_lock_irq(&driver_lock);
-                ...
-                driver_data.finish = 0;
-                driver_data.new_work = 2;
-                ...
-                spin_unlock_irq(&driver_lock);
-                ...
-        }
-
-the above code has a number of advantages:
-
-- the locking relation is easier to understand - actual lock usage
-  pinpoints the critical sections. cli() usage is too opaque.
-  Easier to understand means it's easier to debug.
-
-- it's faster, because spinlocks are faster to acquire than the
-  potentially heavily-used IRQ lock. Furthermore, your driver does
-  not have to wait eg. for a big heavy SCSI interrupt to finish,
-  because the driver_lock spinlock is only used by your driver.
-  cli() on the other hand was used by many drivers, and extended
-  the critical section to the whole IRQ handler function - creating
-  serious lock contention.
-
- 
-to make the transition easier, we've still kept the cli(), sti(),
-save_flags(), save_flags_cli() and restore_flags() macros defined
-on UP systems - but their usage will be phased out until 2.6 is
-released.
-
-drivers that want to disable local interrupts (interrupts on the
-current CPU), can use the following five macros:
-
-  local_irq_disable(), local_irq_enable(), local_save_flags(flags),
-  local_irq_save(flags), local_irq_restore(flags)
-
-but beware, their meaning and semantics are much simpler, far from
-that of the old cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags) and restore_flags(flags)
-SMP meaning:
-
-    local_irq_disable()       => turn local IRQs off
-
-    local_irq_enable()        => turn local IRQs on
-
-    local_save_flags(flags)   => save the current IRQ state into flags. The
-                                 state can be on or off. (on some
-                                 architectures there's even more bits in it.)
-
-    local_irq_save(flags)     => save the current IRQ state into flags and
-                                 disable interrupts.
-
-    local_irq_restore(flags)  => restore the IRQ state from flags.
-
-(local_irq_save can save both irqs on and irqs off state, and
-local_irq_restore can restore into both irqs on and irqs off state.)
-
-another related change is that synchronize_irq() now takes a parameter:
-synchronize_irq(irq). This change too has the purpose of making SMP
-synchronization more lightweight - this way you can wait for your own
-interrupt handler to finish, no need to wait for other IRQ sources.
-
-
-why were these changes done? The main reason was the architectural burden
-of maintaining the cli()/sti() interface - it became a real problem. The
-new interrupt system is much more streamlined, easier to understand, debug,
-and it's also a bit faster - the same happened to it that will happen to
-cli()/sti() using drivers once they convert to spinlocks :-)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/Makefile b/Documentation/connector/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8df1a7285a06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/connector/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONNECTOR),)
+obj-m += cn_test.o
+endif
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := ucon
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_ucon.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt
index ffdb5323df37..3d0b915035b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/index.txt
@@ -35,11 +35,9 @@ Mailing List
 ------------
 There is a CPU frequency changing CVS commit and general list where
 you can report bugs, problems or submit patches. To post a message,
-send an email to cpufreq@lists.linux.org.uk, to subscribe go to
-http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq. Previous post to the
-mailing list are available to subscribers at
-http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/private/cpufreq/.
-
+send an email to cpufreq@vger.kernel.org, to subscribe go to
+http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq and follow the
+instructions there.
 
 Links
 -----
@@ -50,7 +48,7 @@ how to access the CVS repository:
 * http://cvs.arm.linux.org.uk/
 
 the CPUFreq Mailing list:
-* http://lists.linux.org.uk/mailman/listinfo/cpufreq
+* http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#cpufreq
 
 Clock and voltage scaling for the SA-1100:
 * http://www.lartmaker.nl/projects/scaling
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
index ba0aacde94fb..94bbc27ddd4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
@@ -59,15 +59,10 @@ apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't
 mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this
 parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map.
 
-s390 uses the number of cpus it detects at IPL time to also the number of bits
-in cpu_possible_map. If it is desired to add additional cpus at a later time
-the number should be specified using this option or the possible_cpus option.
-
 possible_cpus=n         [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
                         This option sets possible_cpus bits in
                         cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
                         constant even if the machine gets rebooted.
-                        This option overrides additional_cpus.
 
 CPU maps and such
 -----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt
index 1f5a924d1e56..47e568a9370a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt
@@ -635,14 +635,16 @@ prior 'mems' setting, will not be moved.
 
 There is an exception to the above.  If hotplug functionality is used
 to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset,
-then the kernel will automatically update the cpus_allowed of all
-tasks attached to CPUs in that cpuset to allow all CPUs.  When memory
-hotplug functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a
-similar exception is expected to apply there as well.  In general,
-the kernel prefers to violate cpuset placement, over starving a task
-that has had all its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline.  User
-code should reconfigure cpusets to only refer to online CPUs and Memory
-Nodes when using hotplug to add or remove such resources.
+then all the tasks in that cpuset will be moved to the nearest ancestor
+with non-empty cpus.  But the moving of some (or all) tasks might fail if
+cpuset is bound with another cgroup subsystem which has some restrictions
+on task attaching.  In this failing case, those tasks will stay
+in the original cpuset, and the kernel will automatically update
+their cpus_allowed to allow all online CPUs.  When memory hotplug
+functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a similar exception
+is expected to apply there as well.  In general, the kernel prefers to
+violate cpuset placement, over starving a task that has had all
+its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline.
 
 There is a second exception to the above.  GFP_ATOMIC requests are
 kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately.
diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt
index e6244cde26e9..05c80645e4ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devices.txt
@@ -2560,9 +2560,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
                  96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0  1st USB HID device
                     ...
                 111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15 16th USB HID device
-                112 = /dev/usb/auer0    1st auerswald ISDN device
-                    ...
-                127 = /dev/usb/auer15   16th auerswald ISDN device
                 128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0  First Braille Voyager device
                     ...
                 131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3  Fourth Braille Voyager device
diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff
index 881e6dd03aea..27809357da58 100644
--- a/Documentation/dontdiff
+++ b/Documentation/dontdiff
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@
 *.css
 *.dvi
 *.eps
+*.fw.gen.S
+*.fw
 *.gif
 *.grep
 *.grp
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index c23955404bf5..cc8093c15cf5 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -6,6 +6,24 @@ be removed from this file.
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:   old static regulatory information and ieee80211_regdom module parameter
+When:   2.6.29
+Why:    The old regulatory infrastructure has been replaced with a new one
+        which does not require statically defined regulatory domains. We do
+        not want to keep static regulatory domains in the kernel due to the
+        the dynamic nature of regulatory law and localization. We kept around
+        the old static definitions for the regulatory domains of:
+                * US
+                * JP
+                * EU
+        and used by default the US when CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY was
+        set. We also kept around the ieee80211_regdom module parameter in case
+        some applications were relying on it. Changing regulatory domains
+        can now be done instead by using nl80211, as is done with iw.
+Who:    Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:   dev->power.power_state
 When:   July 2007
 Why:    Broken design for runtime control over driver power states, confusing
@@ -19,15 +37,6 @@ Who:	Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   old NCR53C9x driver
-When:   October 2007
-Why:    Replaced by the much better esp_scsi driver.  Actual low-level
-        driver can be ported over almost trivially.
-Who:    David Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
-        Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and video_decoder.h from Video devices.
 When:   December 2008
 Files:  include/linux/video_decoder.h include/linux/videodev.h
@@ -205,19 +214,6 @@ Who:  Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What: The arch/ppc and include/asm-ppc directories
-When: Jun 2008
-Why:  The arch/powerpc tree is the merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64
-      platforms.  Currently there are efforts underway to port the remaining
-      arch/ppc platforms to the merged tree.  New submissions to the arch/ppc
-      tree have been frozen with the 2.6.22 kernel release and that tree will
-      remain in bug-fix only mode until its scheduled removal.  Platforms
-      that are not ported by June 2008 will be removed due to the lack of an
-      interested maintainer.
-Who:  linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks
 When:   April 2010
 
@@ -254,6 +250,9 @@ What (Why):
         - xt_mark match revision 0
           (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1)
 
+        - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir
+          (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent)
+
 When:   January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first
 Why:    Superseded by newer revisions or modules
 Who:    Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de>
@@ -288,14 +287,6 @@ Who:	Glauber Costa <gcosta@redhat.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:   old style serial driver for ColdFire (CONFIG_SERIAL_COLDFIRE)
-When:   2.6.28
-Why:    This driver still uses the old interface and has been replaced
-        by CONFIG_SERIAL_MCF.
-Who:    Sebastian Siewior <sebastian@breakpoint.cc>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   /sys/o2cb symlink
 When:   January 2010
 Why:    /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb
@@ -344,3 +335,11 @@ Why:  Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation.
       controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter.
 Who:  Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl>
 
+---------------------------
+
+What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI)
+When: 2.6.29
+Why:  The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which
+      eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more
+      efficient in every way.
+Who:  FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 680fb566b928..8362860e21a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ prototypes:
         void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
 locking rules:
                 may block       BKL
-get_sb          yes             yes
-kill_sb         yes             yes
+get_sb          yes             no
+kill_sb         yes             no
 
 ->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount
 (exclusive on ->s_umount).
@@ -409,12 +409,12 @@ ioctl:			yes	(see below)
 unlocked_ioctl:         no      (see below)
 compat_ioctl:           no
 mmap:                   no
-open:                   maybe   (see below)
+open:                   no
 flush:                  no
 release:                no
 fsync:                  no      (see below)
 aio_fsync:              no
-fasync:                 yes     (see below)
+fasync:                 no
 lock:                   yes
 readv:                  no
 writev:                 no
@@ -431,13 +431,6 @@ For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode
 semaphore.  Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no
 protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL.
 
-->open() locking is in-transit: big lock partially moved into the methods.
-The only exception is ->open() in the instances of file_operations that never
-end up in ->i_fop/->proc_fops, i.e. ones that belong to character devices
-(chrdev_open() takes lock before replacing ->f_op and calling the secondary
-method. As soon as we fix the handling of module reference counters all
-instances of ->open() will be called without the BKL.
-
 Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive
 loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still
 grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..be7ec5e67dbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONFIGFS_FS),)
+obj-m += configfs_example_explicit.o configfs_example_macros.o
+endif
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
index 44c97e6accb2..fabcb0e00f25 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
@@ -311,9 +311,20 @@ the subsystem must be ready for it.
 [An Example]
 
 The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children
-subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example.c  It
-shows a trivial object displaying and storing an attribute, and a simple
-group creating and destroying these children.
+subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example_explicit.c
+and configfs_example_macros.c.  It shows a trivial object displaying and
+storing an attribute, and a simple group creating and destroying these
+children.
+
+The only difference between configfs_example_explicit.c and
+configfs_example_macros.c is how the attributes of the childless item
+are defined.  The childless item has extended attributes, each with
+their own show()/store() operation.  This follows a convention commonly
+used in sysfs.  configfs_example_explicit.c creates these attributes
+by explicitly defining the structures involved.  Conversely
+configfs_example_macros.c uses some convenience macros from configfs.h
+to define the attributes.  These macros are similar to their sysfs
+counterparts.
 
 [Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Mutex]
 
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c
index 039648791701..d428cc9f07f3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 /*
  * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8:
  *
- * configfs_example.c - This file is a demonstration module containing
- *      a number of configfs subsystems.
+ * configfs_example_explicit.c - This file is a demonstration module
+ *      containing a number of configfs subsystems.  It explicitly defines
+ *      each structure without using the helper macros defined in
+ *      configfs.h.
  *
  * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
  * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
@@ -281,7 +283,6 @@ static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group,
         if (!simple_child)
                 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
-
         config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
                                    &simple_child_type);
 
@@ -302,8 +303,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = {
 };
 
 static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
-                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
-                                         char *page)
+                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                         char *page)
 {
         return sprintf(page,
 "[02-simple-children]\n"
@@ -318,7 +319,7 @@ static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item)
 }
 
 static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
-        .release        = simple_children_release,
+        .release        = simple_children_release,
         .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show,
 };
 
@@ -368,7 +369,6 @@ static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group
         if (!simple_children)
                 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
 
-
         config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
                                     &simple_children_type);
 
@@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = {
 };
 
 static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
-                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
-                                        char *page)
+                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                        char *page)
 {
         return sprintf(page,
 "[03-group-children]\n"
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8e30a0378aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+/*
+ * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8:
+ *
+ * configfs_example_macros.c - This file is a demonstration module
+ *      containing a number of configfs subsystems.  It uses the helper
+ *      macros defined by configfs.h
+ *
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+ * License along with this program; if not, write to the
+ * Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+ * Boston, MA 021110-1307, USA.
+ *
+ * Based on sysfs:
+ *      sysfs is Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Patrick Mochel
+ *
+ * configfs Copyright (C) 2005 Oracle.  All rights reserved.
+ */
+
+#include <linux/init.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/slab.h>
+
+#include <linux/configfs.h>
+
+
+
+/*
+ * 01-childless
+ *
+ * This first example is a childless subsystem.  It cannot create
+ * any config_items.  It just has attributes.
+ *
+ * Note that we are enclosing the configfs_subsystem inside a container.
+ * This is not necessary if a subsystem has no attributes directly
+ * on the subsystem.  See the next example, 02-simple-children, for
+ * such a subsystem.
+ */
+
+struct childless {
+        struct configfs_subsystem subsys;
+        int showme;
+        int storeme;
+};
+
+static inline struct childless *to_childless(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(to_configfs_subsystem(to_config_group(item)), struct childless, subsys) : NULL;
+}
+
+CONFIGFS_ATTR_STRUCT(childless);
+#define CHILDLESS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)     \
+struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+#define CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show) \
+struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show);
+
+static ssize_t childless_showme_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                     char *page)
+{
+        ssize_t pos;
+
+        pos = sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->showme);
+        childless->showme++;
+
+        return pos;
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_storeme_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                      char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->storeme);
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless,
+                                       const char *page,
+                                       size_t count)
+{
+        unsigned long tmp;
+        char *p = (char *) page;
+
+        tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
+        if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
+                return -EINVAL;
+
+        if (tmp > INT_MAX)
+                return -ERANGE;
+
+        childless->storeme = tmp;
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static ssize_t childless_description_read(struct childless *childless,
+                                          char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[01-childless]\n"
+"\n"
+"The childless subsystem is the simplest possible subsystem in\n"
+"configfs.  It does not support the creation of child config_items.\n"
+"It only has a few attributes.  In fact, it isn't much different\n"
+"than a directory in /proc.\n");
+}
+
+CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(showme, childless_showme_read);
+CHILDLESS_ATTR(storeme, S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, childless_storeme_read,
+               childless_storeme_write);
+CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(description, childless_description_read);
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *childless_attrs[] = {
+        &childless_attr_showme.attr,
+        &childless_attr_storeme.attr,
+        &childless_attr_description.attr,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+CONFIGFS_ATTR_OPS(childless);
+static struct configfs_item_operations childless_item_ops = {
+        .show_attribute         = childless_attr_show,
+        .store_attribute        = childless_attr_store,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type childless_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &childless_item_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = childless_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct childless childless_subsys = {
+        .subsys = {
+                .su_group = {
+                        .cg_item = {
+                                .ci_namebuf = "01-childless",
+                                .ci_type = &childless_type,
+                        },
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * 02-simple-children
+ *
+ * This example merely has a simple one-attribute child.  Note that
+ * there is no extra attribute structure, as the child's attribute is
+ * known from the get-go.  Also, there is no container for the
+ * subsystem, as it has no attributes of its own.
+ */
+
+struct simple_child {
+        struct config_item item;
+        int storeme;
+};
+
+static inline struct simple_child *to_simple_child(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(item, struct simple_child, item) : NULL;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute simple_child_attr_storeme = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "storeme",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *simple_child_attrs[] = {
+        &simple_child_attr_storeme,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t simple_child_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                      struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                      char *page)
+{
+        ssize_t count;
+        struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
+
+        count = sprintf(page, "%d\n", simple_child->storeme);
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static ssize_t simple_child_attr_store(struct config_item *item,
+                                       struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                       const char *page, size_t count)
+{
+        struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
+        unsigned long tmp;
+        char *p = (char *) page;
+
+        tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
+        if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
+                return -EINVAL;
+
+        if (tmp > INT_MAX)
+                return -ERANGE;
+
+        simple_child->storeme = tmp;
+
+        return count;
+}
+
+static void simple_child_release(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        kfree(to_simple_child(item));
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations simple_child_item_ops = {
+        .release                = simple_child_release,
+        .show_attribute         = simple_child_attr_show,
+        .store_attribute        = simple_child_attr_store,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &simple_child_item_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = simple_child_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+
+struct simple_children {
+        struct config_group group;
+};
+
+static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL;
+}
+
+static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
+{
+        struct simple_child *simple_child;
+
+        simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (!simple_child)
+                return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
+
+        config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
+                                   &simple_child_type);
+
+        simple_child->storeme = 0;
+
+        return &simple_child->item;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "description",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = {
+        &simple_children_attr_description,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                         struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                         char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[02-simple-children]\n"
+"\n"
+"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_items.  These\n"
+"items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n");
+}
+
+static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item)
+{
+        kfree(to_simple_children(item));
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
+        .release        = simple_children_release,
+        .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show,
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
+ * no ->drop_item() is provided.
+ */
+static struct configfs_group_operations simple_children_group_ops = {
+        .make_item      = simple_children_make_item,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type simple_children_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &simple_children_item_ops,
+        .ct_group_ops   = &simple_children_group_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = simple_children_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = {
+        .su_group = {
+                .cg_item = {
+                        .ci_namebuf = "02-simple-children",
+                        .ci_type = &simple_children_type,
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * 03-group-children
+ *
+ * This example reuses the simple_children group from above.  However,
+ * the simple_children group is not the subsystem itself, it is a
+ * child of the subsystem.  Creation of a group in the subsystem creates
+ * a new simple_children group.  That group can then have simple_child
+ * children of its own.
+ */
+
+static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
+{
+        struct simple_children *simple_children;
+
+        simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children),
+                                  GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (!simple_children)
+                return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
+
+        config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
+                                    &simple_children_type);
+
+        return &simple_children->group;
+}
+
+static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = {
+        .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
+        .ca_name = "description",
+        .ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = {
+        &group_children_attr_description,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
+                                        struct configfs_attribute *attr,
+                                        char *page)
+{
+        return sprintf(page,
+"[03-group-children]\n"
+"\n"
+"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_groups.  These\n"
+"groups are like the subsystem simple-children.\n");
+}
+
+static struct configfs_item_operations group_children_item_ops = {
+        .show_attribute = group_children_attr_show,
+};
+
+/*
+ * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
+ * no ->drop_item() is provided.
+ */
+static struct configfs_group_operations group_children_group_ops = {
+        .make_group     = group_children_make_group,
+};
+
+static struct config_item_type group_children_type = {
+        .ct_item_ops    = &group_children_item_ops,
+        .ct_group_ops   = &group_children_group_ops,
+        .ct_attrs       = group_children_attrs,
+        .ct_owner       = THIS_MODULE,
+};
+
+static struct configfs_subsystem group_children_subsys = {
+        .su_group = {
+                .cg_item = {
+                        .ci_namebuf = "03-group-children",
+                        .ci_type = &group_children_type,
+                },
+        },
+};
+
+/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * We're now done with our subsystem definitions.
+ * For convenience in this module, here's a list of them all.  It
+ * allows the init function to easily register them.  Most modules
+ * will only have one subsystem, and will only call register_subsystem
+ * on it directly.
+ */
+static struct configfs_subsystem *example_subsys[] = {
+        &childless_subsys.subsys,
+        &simple_children_subsys,
+        &group_children_subsys,
+        NULL,
+};
+
+static int __init configfs_example_init(void)
+{
+        int ret;
+        int i;
+        struct configfs_subsystem *subsys;
+
+        for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
+                subsys = example_subsys[i];
+
+                config_group_init(&subsys->su_group);
+                mutex_init(&subsys->su_mutex);
+                ret = configfs_register_subsystem(subsys);
+                if (ret) {
+                        printk(KERN_ERR "Error %d while registering subsystem %s\n",
+                               ret,
+                               subsys->su_group.cg_item.ci_namebuf);
+                        goto out_unregister;
+                }
+        }
+
+        return 0;
+
+out_unregister:
+        for (; i >= 0; i--) {
+                configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
+        }
+
+        return ret;
+}
+
+static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void)
+{
+        int i;
+
+        for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
+                configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
+        }
+}
+
+module_init(configfs_example_init);
+module_exit(configfs_example_exit);
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
index 80e193d82e2e..eb154ef36c2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
@@ -26,9 +26,15 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
 
     git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git
 
-  - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type:
+  - Note that it is highly important to install the mke2fs.conf file
+    that comes with the e2fsprogs 1.41.x sources in /etc/mke2fs.conf. If
+    you have edited the /etc/mke2fs.conf file installed on your system,
+    you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs
+    1.41.x.
 
-        # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1
+  - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type:
+
+        # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1
 
     Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set
     the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development
@@ -41,13 +47,13 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
 
         # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1
 
-    (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4dev
+    (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4
     filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production
     filesystems.)
 
   - Mounting:
 
-        # mount -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 /wherever
+        # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever
 
   - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that
     ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.
@@ -171,6 +177,11 @@ barrier=<0|1(*)>	This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
                         your disks are battery-backed in one way or another,
                         disabling barriers may safely improve performance.
 
+inode_readahead=n       This tuning parameter controls the maximum
+                        number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode
+                        table readahead algorithm will pre-read into
+                        the buffer cache.  The default value is 32 blocks.
+
 orlov           (*)     This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
                         enabled by default.
 
@@ -212,6 +223,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
 errors=continue         Keep going on a filesystem error.
 errors=panic            Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
 
+data_err=ignore(*)      Just print an error message if an error occurs
+                        in a file data buffer in ordered mode.
+data_err=abort          Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file
+                        data buffer in ordered mode.
+
 grpid                   Give objects the same group ID as their creator.
 bsdgroups
 
@@ -246,6 +262,7 @@ stripe=n		Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try
 delalloc        (*)     Deferring block allocation until write-out time.
 nodelalloc              Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation
                         when data is copied from user to page cache.
+
 Data Mode
 =========
 There are 3 different data modes:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1e3defcfe50b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+============
+Fiemap Ioctl
+============
+
+The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file
+extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap
+returns a list of extents.
+
+
+Request Basics
+--------------
+
+A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap:
+
+struct fiemap {
+        __u64   fm_start;        /* logical offset (inclusive) at
+                                  * which to start mapping (in) */
+        __u64   fm_length;       /* logical length of mapping which
+                                  * userspace cares about (in) */
+        __u32   fm_flags;        /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */
+        __u32   fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were
+                                    * mapped (out) */
+        __u32   fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */
+        __u32   fm_reserved;
+        struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */
+};
+
+
+fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file
+which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror
+those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent
+may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned
+extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes.
+
+Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be
+set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular
+flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain
+the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
+with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
+It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
+flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
+fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
+compatibility with old software.
+
+fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array
+that can be used to return extents.  If fm_extent_count is zero, then the
+fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the
+fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in
+fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping.  Note that there is
+nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP.
+
+The following flags can be set in fm_flags:
+
+* FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC
+If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents.
+
+* FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
+If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
+extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree.
+
+
+Extent Mapping
+--------------
+
+Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array
+which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The
+number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via
+fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be
+returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents
+allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range,
+the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[]
+array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to
+fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not
+complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
+flag set (see the next section on extent flags).
+
+Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as
+returned in fm_extents.
+
+struct fiemap_extent {
+        __u64   fe_logical;  /* logical offset in bytes for the start of
+                              * the extent */
+        __u64   fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start
+                              * of the extent */
+        __u64   fe_length;   /* length in bytes for the extent */
+        __u64   fe_reserved64[2];
+        __u32   fe_flags;    /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */
+        __u32   fe_reserved[3];
+};
+
+All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk.  It is valid
+for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical
+length to extend past the request.  Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
+returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
+block size of the file system.  With the exception of extents flagged as
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged.
+
+The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned.
+A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in
+the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no
+more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again.
+
+Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the
+presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for
+a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags
+which imply that property.
+
+For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
+are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking
+for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software
+which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents
+however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to
+worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned
+data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
+This is the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past this
+extent will return nothing.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN
+The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate
+the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has
+been allocated for the file yet.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
+  - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
+Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's
+physical location has not been allocated yet.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
+This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is
+encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed).  Reading the data in this
+extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results.
+
+Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data
+in-place by writing to the indicated location without the
+assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the
+information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem
+is mounted.  In other words, user applications may only read the
+extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is
+unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is
+clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the
+filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED
+  - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
+The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+Data is located within a meta data block.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
+Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been
+initialized.  This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
+through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
+the device.
+
+* FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED
+This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block
+based addressing scheme.  Since returning an extent for each block back to
+userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most
+adjacent blocks into 'extents'.
+
+
+VFS -> File System Implementation
+---------------------------------
+
+File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
+their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
+defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
+each discovered extent:
+
+struct inode_operations {
+       ...
+
+       int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start,
+                     u64 len);
+
+->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the
+fiemap request:
+
+struct fiemap_extent_info {
+        unsigned int fi_flags;          /* Flags as passed from user */
+        unsigned int fi_extents_mapped; /* Number of mapped extents */
+        unsigned int fi_extents_max;    /* Size of fiemap_extent array */
+        struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start; /* Start of fiemap_extent array */
+};
+
+It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this
+structure directly.
+
+
+Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the
+fiemap_check_flags() helper:
+
+int fiemap_check_flags(struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo, u32 fs_flags);
+
+The struct fieinfo should be passed in as recieved from ioctl_fiemap(). The
+set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If
+fiemap_check_flags finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in
+fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from
+fiemap_check_flags(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to
+ioctl_fiemap().
+
+
+For each extent in the request range, the file system should call
+the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent():
+
+int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical,
+                            u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev);
+
+fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the
+next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will
+automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file
+system so that the userspace API is not broken.
+
+fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the
+user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered
+while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
index e79ee2db183a..ac2a261c5f7d 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Web site
 ========
 
 There is plenty of additional information on the linux-ntfs web site
-at http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/
+at http://www.linux-ntfs.org/
 
 The web site has a lot of additional information, such as a comprehensive
 FAQ, documentation on the NTFS on-disk format, information on the Linux-NTFS
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ And you would know that /dev/hda2 has a size of 37768814 - 4209030 + 1 =
 For Win2k and later dynamic disks, you can for example use the ldminfo utility
 which is part of the Linux LDM tools (the latest version at the time of
 writing is linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2).  You can download it from:
-        http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/downloads.html
+        http://www.linux-ntfs.org/
 Simply extract the downloaded archive (tar xvjf linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2), go
 into it (cd linux-ldm-0.0.8) and change to the test directory (cd test).  You
 will find the precompiled (i386) ldminfo utility there.  NOTE: You will not be
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 64557821ee59..b488edad743c 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -923,45 +923,44 @@ CPUs.
 The   "procs_blocked" line gives  the  number of  processes currently blocked,
 waiting for I/O to complete.
 
+
 1.9 Ext4 file system parameters
 ------------------------------
-Ext4 file system have one directory per partition under /proc/fs/ext4/
-# ls /proc/fs/ext4/hdc/
-group_prealloc  max_to_scan  mb_groups  mb_history  min_to_scan  order2_req
-stats  stream_req
-
-mb_groups:
-This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
-
-mb_history:
-Multiblock allocation history.
-
-stats:
-This file indicate whether the multiblock allocator should start collecting
-statistics. The statistics are shown during unmount
 
-group_prealloc:
-The multiblock allocator normalize the block allocation request to
-group_prealloc filesystem blocks if we don't have strip value set.
-The stripe value can be specified at mount time or during mke2fs.
+Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in
+/proc/fs/ext4.  Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in
+/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or
+/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0).   The files in each per-device directory are shown
+in Table 1-10, below.
 
-max_to_scan:
-How long multiblock allocator can look for a best extent (in found extents)
-
-min_to_scan:
-How long multiblock allocator  must look for a best extent
-
-order2_req:
-Multiblock allocator use  2^N search using buddies only for requests greater
-than or equal to order2_req. The request size is specfied in file system
-blocks. A value of 2 indicate only if the requests are greater than or equal
-to 4 blocks.
+Table 1-10: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname>
+..............................................................................
+ File            Content                                        
+ mb_groups       details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
+ mb_history      multiblock allocation history
+ stats           controls whether the multiblock allocator should start
+                 collecting statistics, which are shown during the unmount
+ group_prealloc  the multiblock allocator will round up allocation
+                 requests to a multiple of this tuning parameter if the
+                 stripe size is not set in the ext4 superblock
+ max_to_scan     The maximum number of extents the multiblock allocator
+                 will search to find the best extent
+ min_to_scan     The minimum number of extents the multiblock allocator
+                 will search to find the best extent
+ order2_req      Tuning parameter which controls the minimum size for 
+                 requests (as a power of 2) where the buddy cache is
+                 used
+ stream_req      Files which have fewer blocks than this tunable
+                 parameter will have their blocks allocated out of a
+                 block group specific preallocation pool, so that small
+                 files are packed closely together.  Each large file
+                 will have its blocks allocated out of its own unique
+                 preallocation pool.
+inode_readahead  Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of
+                 inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead
+                 algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache
+..............................................................................
 
-stream_req:
-Files smaller than stream_req are served by the stream allocator, whose
-purpose is to pack requests as close each to other as possible to
-produce smooth I/O traffic. Avalue of 16 indicate that file smaller than 16
-filesystem block size will use group based preallocation.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Summary
@@ -1332,12 +1331,24 @@ determine whether or not they are still functioning properly.
 Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI
 watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
 
-maps_protect
-------------
+msgmni
+------
+
+Maximum number of message queue ids on the system.
+This value scales to the amount of lowmem. It is automatically recomputed
+upon memory add/remove or ipc namespace creation/removal.
+When a value is written into this file, msgmni's value becomes fixed, i.e. it
+is not recomputed anymore when one of the above events occurs.
+Use auto_msgmni to change this behavior.
+
+auto_msgmni
+-----------
 
-Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and
-"smaps".  When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to
-readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process.
+Enables/Disables automatic recomputing of msgmni upon memory add/remove or
+upon ipc namespace creation/removal (see the msgmni description above).
+Echoing "1" into this file enables msgmni automatic recomputing.
+Echoing "0" turns it off.
+auto_msgmni default value is 1.
 
 
 2.4 /proc/sys/vm - The virtual memory subsystem
@@ -2394,6 +2405,8 @@ The following 4 memory types are supported:
   - (bit 1) anonymous shared memory
   - (bit 2) file-backed private memory
   - (bit 3) file-backed shared memory
+  - (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is
+            effective only if the bit 2 is cleared)
 
   Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages
   are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
index a590c4093eff..5e8de25bf0f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt
@@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Quota subsystem
 ===============
 
 Quota subsystem allows system administrator to set limits on used space and
-number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated
-with each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and
-number of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called
-softlimit and the second one hardlimit.  An user can never exceed a hardlimit
-for any resource. User is allowed to exceed softlimit but only for limited
-period of time. This period is called "grace period" or "grace time". When
-grace time is over, user is not able to allocate more space/inodes until he
-frees enough of them to get below softlimit.
+number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated with
+each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and number
+of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called softlimit
+and the second one hardlimit.  An user can never exceed a hardlimit for any
+resource (unless he has CAP_SYS_RESOURCE capability). User is allowed to exceed
+softlimit but only for limited period of time. This period is called "grace
+period" or "grace time". When grace time is over, user is not able to allocate
+more space/inodes until he frees enough of them to get below softlimit.
 
 Quota limits (and amount of grace time) are set independently for each
 filesystem.
@@ -53,6 +53,12 @@ in parentheses):
                 QUOTA_NL_BSOFTLONGWARN - space (block) softlimit is exceeded
                   longer than given grace period.
                 QUOTA_NL_BSOFTWARN - space (block) softlimit
+          - four warnings are also defined for the event when user stops
+            exceeding some limit:
+                QUOTA_NL_IHARDBELOW - inode hardlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_ISOFTBELOW - inode softlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_BHARDBELOW - space (block) hardlimit
+                QUOTA_NL_BSOFTBELOW - space (block) softlimit
         QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MAJOR (u32)
           - major number of a device with the affected filesystem
         QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MINOR (u32)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
index 540e9e7f59c5..6a0d70a22f05 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-flight compression which makes
 it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash.
 
 Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts.
-It does not need stuff like ckfs.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
+It does not need stuff like fsck.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
 journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data
 structures are consistent.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt
index f218f616ff6b..d330fe3103da 100644
--- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@
 Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc.
    Author:   Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com>
   License:   The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+               (dual licensed under the GPL v2)
 Reviewers:   Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton,
              John Kacur, and David Teigland.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473
index 2126de34c711..1cbf671822e2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473
@@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ Description
 
 This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7473 chip family.
 
-The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0
+The ADT7473 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0
 specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3)
-temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has three (3) 16-bit counters for
+temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for
 measuring fan speed. There are three (3) PWM outputs that can be used
 to control fan speed.
 
 A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the
-LM85 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the
+ADT7473 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the
 three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and
 programmable. Once configured, the ADT7473 will adjust the PWM outputs in
 response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention.
@@ -46,14 +46,6 @@ from the raw value to get the temperature value.
 The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
 determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control.
 
-Hardware Configurations
------------------------
-
-The ADT7473 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be used to
-signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature sensors
-fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't trigger
-SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces the PWM2 function.
-
 Configuration Notes
 -------------------
 
@@ -61,8 +53,8 @@ Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following:
 
 * PWM Control
 
-* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and pwm#_auto_point1_temp and
-* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and pwm#_auto_point2_temp -
+* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and
+* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp -
 
 point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
 point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
index 8f446070e64a..001d2e70bc11 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
@@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'sch311x'
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
     Datasheet: http://www.nuhorizons.com/FeaturedProducts/Volume1/SMSC/311x.pdf
+  * SMSC SCH5027
+    Prefix: 'sch5027'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
 
 Authors:
     Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com>
@@ -22,34 +26,36 @@ Module Parameters
                         and PWM output control functions. Using this parameter
                         shouldn't be required since the BIOS usually takes care
                         of this.
-
-Note that there is no need to use this parameter if the driver loads without
-complaining. The driver will say so if it is necessary.
+* probe_all_addr: bool  Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e
+                        when probing for ISA devices. This is required for the
+                        following boards:
+                        - VIA EPIA SN18000
 
 
 Description
 -----------
 
 This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the
-SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) and SMSC SCH311x Super-I/O
-chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote
-diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and up
-to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM
-outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and
+SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, and SMSC
+SCH311x Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors
+temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and
+1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement
+up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and
 automatically.
 
-For the DME1737 and A8000, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. Fan[3-6]
-and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on the
-configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are present
-during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly.
+For the DME1737, A8000 and SCH5027, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present.
+Fan[3-6] and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on
+the configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are
+present during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly.
 
 For the SCH311x, fan[1-3] and pwm[1-3] are always present and fan[4-6] and
 pwm[5-6] don't exist.
 
-The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737 and A8000 are only accessible
-via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. The driver
-will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects a DME1737
-or A8000 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x chip.
+The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737, A8000, and SCH5027 are only
+accessible via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus.
+The driver will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects
+a DME1737, A8000, or SCH5027 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x
+chip.
 
 
 Voltage Monitoring
@@ -60,6 +66,7 @@ scaling resistors. The values returned by the driver therefore reflect true
 millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows
 (the last column indicates the input ranges):
 
+DME1737, A8000:
         in0: +5VTR      (+5V standby)           0V - 6.64V
         in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 3V
         in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
@@ -68,6 +75,24 @@ millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows
         in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
         in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
 
+SCH311x:
+        in0: +2.5V                              0V - 6.64V
+        in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 2V
+        in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
+        in3: +5V                                0V - 6.64V
+        in4: +12V                               0V - 16V
+        in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
+        in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
+
+SCH5027:
+        in0: +5VTR      (+5V standby)           0V - 6.64V
+        in1: Vccp       (processor core)        0V - 3V
+        in2: VCC        (internal +3.3V)        0V - 4.38V
+        in3: V2_IN                              0V - 1.5V
+        in4: V1_IN                              0V - 1.5V
+        in5: VTR        (+3.3V standby)         0V - 4.38V
+        in6: Vbat       (+3.0V)                 0V - 4.38V
+
 Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm
 when crossed.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
index 2fefaf582a43..e98bdfea3467 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
 Kernel driver ibmaem
 ======================
 
+This driver talks to the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager, known
+henceforth as AEM.
+
 Supported systems:
-  * Any recent IBM System X server with Active Energy Manager support.
+  * Any recent IBM System X server with AEM support.
     This includes the x3350, x3550, x3650, x3655, x3755, x3850 M2,
     x3950 M2, and certain HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades.  The IPMI host interface
     driver ("ipmi-si") needs to be loaded for this driver to do anything.
@@ -14,24 +17,22 @@ Author: Darrick J. Wong
 Description
 -----------
 
-This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power
-meters available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC.  All
-sensor banks will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk
-to both v1 and v2 interfaces.  This driver is completely separate from the
-older ibmpex driver.
+This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power meters
+available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC.  All sensor banks
+will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk to both v1 and v2
+interfaces.  This driver is completely separate from the older ibmpex driver.
 
-The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use.
-There is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption
-since the last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power
-use over a configurable interval.
+The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use.  There
+is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption since the
+last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power use over a
+configurable interval.
 
-The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present
-a wider range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as
-set by the AEM software, and temperature sensors.
+The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present a wider
+range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as set by the AEM
+software, and temperature sensors.
 
 Special Features
 ----------------
 
-The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by
-the Active Energy Manager software.  Setting the power cap from the host
-is not currently supported.
+The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by the AEM
+software.  Setting the power cap from the host is not currently supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index f4ce1fdbeff6..3496b7020e7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -6,12 +6,14 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'it87'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8705F_V.0.4.1.pdf
   * IT8712F
     Prefix: 'it8712'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.1.pdf
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/Errata%20V0.1%20for%20IT8712F%20V0.9.1.pdf
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.3.pdf
   * IT8716F/IT8726F
     Prefix: 'it8716'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
@@ -90,14 +92,13 @@ upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you
 can't have both on a given board.
 
 The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
-2 additional fans. They are supported by the driver for the IT8716F and
-IT8718F but not for the IT8712F
+2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver.
 
 The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional
 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan
 clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
-revisions. For now, the driver only uses the 16-bit mode on the
-IT8716F and IT8718F.
+revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one
+of the above chips is detected.
 
 The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware
 for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
index 9549237530cf..6d41db7f17f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
@@ -96,11 +96,6 @@ initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has
 confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the
 documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register.
 
-The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms
-resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit
-accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The
-counter will stay at it's max value until read.
-
 See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note
 from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85.
 The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
@@ -206,13 +201,15 @@ Configuration choices:
 
 The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration
 features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these,
-see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260.
+see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. These features
+are not currently supported by the lm85 driver.
 
 The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements.
 The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring
 can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to
 the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the
-measurements.
+measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85
+driver.
 
 In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control
 and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
index 2d845730d4e0..6dbfd5efd991 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
@@ -329,6 +329,10 @@ power[1-*]_average		Average power use
                                 Unit: microWatt
                                 RO
 
+power[1-*]_average_interval     Power use averaging interval
+                                Unit: milliseconds
+                                RW
+
 power[1-*]_average_highest      Historical average maximum power use
                                 Unit: microWatt
                                 RO
@@ -354,6 +358,14 @@ power[1-*]_reset_history	Reset input_highest, input_lowest,
                                 WO
 
 **********
+* Energy *
+**********
+
+energy[1-*]_input               Cumulative energy use
+                                Unit: microJoule
+                                RO
+
+**********
 * Alarms *
 **********
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
index 880a59f53da9..6ee36dbafd64 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
@@ -40,10 +40,6 @@ Module Parameters
   (default is 1)
   Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
   Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
-* reset: int
-  (default is 0)
-  The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use
-  'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this.
 
 Description
 -----------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
index f153b2f6d62c..a67d3b7a7098 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ Credits:
 
 Additional contributors:
     Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de>
+    Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl>
 
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
@@ -67,9 +68,8 @@ on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
 
 Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
 triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
-readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3
-and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more
-range or accuracy.
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
+32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy.
 
 Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
 An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/Makefile b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b75db69ec483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := aliasing-test
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
index 3bb5f466a90d..1c6b545635a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -105,7 +105,6 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'T'     all     linux/soundcard.h       conflict!
 'T'     all     asm-i386/ioctls.h       conflict!
 'U'     00-EF   linux/drivers/usb/usb.h
-'U'     F0-FF   drivers/usb/auerswald.c
 'V'     all     linux/vt.h
 'W'     00-1F   linux/watchdog.h        conflict!
 'W'     00-1F   linux/wanrouter.h       conflict!
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt
index 62d4af44ec4a..59df81c8da2b 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/cdrom.txt
@@ -271,14 +271,14 @@ CDROMCLOSETRAY			pendant of CDROMEJECT
 
         usage:
 
-          ioctl(fd, CDROMEJECT, 0);
+          ioctl(fd, CDROMCLOSETRAY, 0);
 
         inputs:         none
 
         outputs:        none
 
         error returns:
-          ENOSYS        cd drive not capable of ejecting
+          ENOSYS        cd drive not capable of closing the tray
           EBUSY         other processes are accessing drive, or door is locked
 
         notes:
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
index 488c77fa3aae..0775cf4798b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a
 fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try
 to update the original English file first.
 
-Last Updated: 2007/11/16
+Last Updated: 2008/08/21
 ==================================
 �れ��
-linux-2.6.24/Documentation/HOWTO
+linux-2.6.27/Documentation/HOWTO
 �和訳��。
 
 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ >
-翻訳日： 2007/11/10
+翻訳日： 2008/8/5
 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com>
 校正者： �倉�ん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com>
          �林 雅典�ん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp>
@@ -287,13 +287,15 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�®é–‹ç™ºãƒ—ロセスã�¯ç�¾åœ¨å¹¾ã�¤ã�‹ã�®ç•°ã�ªã‚‹ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ã‚
     �安定��状態��る�判断�����リリース�れ��。目標�毎週新
     �� -rc カー�ルをリリース�る����。
 
-   - 以下� URL �� -rc リリース�存在�る既知�後戻り�題�リスト
-     �追跡�れ��-
-     http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions
-
   - ��プロセス�カー�ル� 「準備������考�られる��継続��
     �。��プロセス����� 6週間継続���。
 
+  - �リリース��既知�後戻り�題(regression: ��リリース�中�新�
+    �作り込�れ��題を指�) ���都度 Linux-kernel メーリングリスト
+    �投稿�れ��。ゴール�����カー�ル� 「準備������宣言
+    �る����リスト�長�をゼロ�減ら��������実���数個�
+    後戻り�題�リリース時�����残�������。
+
 Andrew Morton � Linux-kernel メーリングリスト�カー�ルリリース���
 �書����を���言�������価値��り��-
   「カー�ル���リリース�れる��誰も知り��ん。���ら��れ��
@@ -303,18 +305,20 @@ Andrew Morton ã�Œ Linux-kernel メーリングリストã�«ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒ�ルリリーã
 2.6.x.y -stable カー�ルツリー
 ---------------------------
 
-�ージョン�4�目�数字����カー�ル� -stable カー�ル��。�れ�
-��2.6.x カー�ル�見����セキュリティ�題や�大�後戻り�対�る比
-較的������修正���れ��。
+�ージョン番��4��数字�分�れ��るカー�ル� -stable カー�ル��。
+�れ���2.6.x カー�ル�見����セキュリティ�題や�大�後戻り�対
+�る比較的������修正���れ��。
 
 �れ��開発/実験的�ージョン�テスト��力�る���興味�無��
 最新�安定��カー�ルを使���ユーザ�推奨�るブラン���。
 
-も��2.6.x.y カー�ル�存在���場����番��一番大�� 2.6.x
-�最新�安定版カー�ル��。
+も��2.6.x.y カー�ル�存在���場����番��一番大�� 2.6.x �
+最新�安定版カー�ル��。
 
-2.6.x.y � "stable" �ーム <stable@kernel.org> �メンテ�れ��り��
-���隔週�リリース�れ����。
+2.6.x.y � "stable" �ーム <stable@kernel.org> �メンテ�れ��り�必
+��応��リリース�れ��。通常�リリース期間� 2週間毎����差�迫�
+��題���れ�も�少�長��る��も�り��。セキュリティ関連��題
+�場���れ�対�������場�����リリース��れ��。
 
 カー�ルツリー�入���る�Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt ファ
 イル����よ��種類�変更� -stable ツリー���入れ�能����リ
@@ -341,7 +345,9 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã�§å�Žé›†ã�•ã‚Œã�Ÿå¤šæ•°ã�®ãƒ‘ッãƒ�ã�¨å�Œæ
 メインライン�入れるよ�� Linus �プッシュ���。
 
 メインカー�ルツリー���る��� Linus ��る�������新��パッ
-�� -mm ツリー�テスト�れる���強�推奨�れ��。
+�� -mm ツリー�テスト�れる���強�推奨�れ����。マージウィン
+ドウ�開��� -mm ツリー��れ����パッ��メインライン�マージ�
+れる���困難��り��。
 
 �れら�カー�ル�安定��動作���システム���使�����切���
 り��ん��カー�ルブラン��中�もも��も動作�リスク�高�も���。
@@ -395,13 +401,15 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã�§å�Žé›†ã�•ã‚Œã�Ÿå¤šæ•°ã�®ãƒ‘ッãƒ�ã�¨å�Œæ
     - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
         git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
 
-    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
+    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com>
         git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
 
+    - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
+        git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git
+
   quilt ツリー-
-    - USB, PCI ドライ�コア� I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
+    - USB, ドライ�コア� I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
         kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
-    - x86-64 � i386 �仲間 Andi Kleen <ak@suse.de>
 
   ��他�カー�ルツリー� http://git.kernel.org/ � MAINTAINERS ファ
   イル�一覧表��り��。
@@ -412,13 +420,32 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã�§å�Žé›†ã�•ã‚Œã�Ÿå¤šæ•°ã�®ãƒ‘ッãƒ�ã�¨å�Œæ
 bugzilla.kernel.org � Linux カー�ル開発者�カー�ル��グを追跡�る
 場所��。ユーザ�見����グ�全�を��ツール�報告�����。
 �� kernel bugzilla を使���詳細��以下を�照������-
-        http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html
-
+        http://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html
 メインカー�ルソースディレクトリ��るファイル REPORTING-BUGS �カー�
 ル�グら��も�������レ�ート�る��良�テンプレート��り��
 題�追跡を助�る���カー�ル開発者�����ん�情報�必�����詳
 細�書�れ����。
 
+�グレ�ート�管�
+-------------------
+
+�����ッキング�スキルを訓練�る最高�方法������他人�レ�ー
+ト���グを修正�る����り��。����カー�ルをより安定化��る
+��寄与�る��������������� �実��題を修正�る��を
+学��自分�スキルも強化�����他�開発者�����存在�気���
+��。�グを修正�る����多��開発者�中�ら自分�功績を��る最善
+��������ら多��人�他人��グ�修正�時間を浪費�る��を好�
+���ら��。
+
+���レ�ート�れ��グ����仕事を�る�����
+http://bugzilla.kernel.org �行������。も�今後��グレ�ート�
+���アド�イスを�������れ��bugme-new メーリングリスト(新�
+��グレ�ート������メール�れる) ��� bugme-janitor メーリン
+グリスト(bugzilla �変更毎����メール�れる)を購読����。
+
+        http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
+        http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
+
 メーリングリスト
 -------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6c42e071d723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+NOTE:
+This is a version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist into Japanese.
+This document is maintained by Takenori Nagano <t-nagano@ah.jp.nec.com>
+and the JF Project team <http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/>.
+If you find any difference between this document and the original file
+or a problem with the translation,
+please contact the maintainer of this file or JF project.
+
+Please also note that the purpose of this file is to be easier to read
+for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a
+fork. So if you have any comments or updates of this file, please try
+to update the original English file first.
+
+Last Updated: 2008/07/14
+==================================
+�れ��
+linux-2.6.26/Documentation/SubmitChecklist �和訳��。
+
+翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ >
+翻訳日： 2008/07/14
+翻訳者： Takenori Nagano <t-nagano at ah dot jp dot nec dot com>
+校正者： Masanori Kobayashi �ん <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp>
+==================================
+
+
+Linux カー�ルパッ�投稿者���ェックリスト
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+本書���パッ�をより素早��り込ん�もら���開発者�実践���基本的�事柄
+を����紹介���。����る全��事柄��Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+���Linuxカー�ルパッ�投稿�際���心得を補足�るも���。
+
+ 1: 妥当�CONFIGオプションや変更�れ�CONFIGオプション���り =y, =m, =n
+    全��正��ビルド��る��を確�������。��際�gcc��リンカ�
+    warningやerrorを出�������も確�������。
+
+ 2: allnoconfig, allmodconfig オプションを用��正��ビルド��る��を
+    確�������。
+
+ 3: 手許�クロスコンパイルツールやOSDL�PLM�よ��も�を用���複数�
+    アーキテク�ャ����も正��ビルド��る��を確�������。
+
+ 4: 64bit長�'unsigned long'を使用���るppc64��クロスコンパイル��
+    �ェック��当�アーキテク�ャ��。
+
+ 5: カー�ルコーディングスタイル�準拠���る����確�������(!)
+
+ 6: CONFIGオプション�追加・変更を��場����CONFIGメニュー�壊れ����
+    ��を確�������。
+
+ 7: 新��Kconfig�オプションを追加�る際���必���helpも記述������。
+
+ 8: �切�Kconfig��存関係を考���ら慎���ェック������。
+    ������作業�マシンを使��テスト���ん�行�����も困難��。
+    ���やる���自分�頭�考�る����。
+
+ 9: sparseを利用���ゃん���コード�ェックを������。
+
+10: 'make checkstack' � 'make namespacecheck' を利用���題�発見�れ�ら
+    修正������。'make checkstack' �明示的��題を示���ん���れ�
+    １��関数�512�イトより大��スタックを使���れ��修正���候補�
+    �り��。
+
+11: グロー�ル�kernel API を説明�る kernel-doc をソース�中��������。
+    ( static�関数�����必須���り��ん�����もら��も�構�� )
+    ����'make htmldocs' も��� 'make mandocs' を利用��追記��
+    ドキュメント��ェックを行���題�見����場���修正を行������。
+
+12: CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB,
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK,
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP �れら全�を�時�有効���動作確�を
+    行������。
+
+13: CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_PREEMPT を有効���場��無効���場��両方�
+    ビルド��上�動作確�を行������。
+
+14: も�パッ��ディスク�I/O性能���影響を与�るよ���れ��
+    'CONFIG_LBD'オプションを有効���場��無効���場��両方�
+    テストを実施��������。
+
+15: lockdep�機能を全�有効���上��全��コードパスを評価������。
+
+16: /proc �新��エントリを追加��場����Documentation/ �下�
+    必�ドキュメントを追加������。
+
+17: 新��ブートパラメータを追加��場����
+    必�Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt �説明を追加������。
+
+18: 新��module�パラメータを追加��場����MODULE_PARM_DESC()を
+    利用��必���説明を記述������。
+
+19: 新��userspaceインタフェースを作���場����Documentation/ABI/ �
+    Documentation/ABI/README を�考���必�ドキュメントを追加������。
+
+20: 'make headers_check'を実行��全��題�����を確�������。
+
+21: 少���もslabアロケーション�pageアロケーション�失敗��場��
+    挙動�����fault-injectionを利用��確�������。
+    Documentation/fault-injection/ を�照������。
+
+    追加��コード���り�������ら��サブシステム特有�
+    fault-injectionを追加�����良��も�れ��ん。
+
+22: 新��追加��コード��`gcc -W'�コンパイル������。
+    ��オプション�大�����メッセージを出力�����
+    "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" �よ��メッセージ��
+    �グを見��る��役�立���。
+
+23: 投稿��パッ�� -mm パッ�セット�マージ�れ�後�全��既存�パッ�や
+    VM, VFS �よ���他�サブシステム�関�る様々�変更���時点�も共存
+    ��る��を確��るテストを行������。
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
index 0bd32748a467..c6841eee9598 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
@@ -168,10 +168,10 @@ if ($#ARGV < 0) {
 mkdir $ARGV[0],0777;
 $state = 0;
 while (<STDIN>) {
-    if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 4 \"([^\"]*)\"/) {
+    if (/^\.TH \"[^\"]*\" 9 \"([^\"]*)\"/) {
         if ($state == 1) { close OUT }
         $state = 1;
-        $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.4";
+        $fn = "$ARGV[0]/$1.9";
         print STDERR "Creating $fn\n";
         open OUT, ">$fn" or die "can't open $fn: $!\n";
         print OUT $_;
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index e7bea3e85304..2443f5bb4364 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -284,6 +284,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         isolate - enable device isolation (each device, as far
                                   as possible, will get its own protection
                                   domain)
+                        fullflush - enable flushing of IO/TLB entries when
+                                    they are unmapped. Otherwise they are
+                                    flushed before they will be reused, which
+                                    is a lot of faster
+
         amd_iommu_size= [HW,X86-64]
                         Define the size of the aperture for the AMD IOMMU
                         driver. Possible values are:
@@ -365,6 +370,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         no delay (0).
                         Format: integer
 
+        bootmem_debug   [KNL] Enable bootmem allocator debug messages.
+
         bttv.card=      [HW,V4L] bttv (bt848 + bt878 based grabber cards)
         bttv.radio=     Most important insmod options are available as
                         kernel args too.
@@ -461,12 +468,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         Range: 0 - 8192
                         Default: 64
 
-        disable_8254_timer
-        enable_8254_timer
-                        [IA32/X86_64] Disable/Enable interrupt 0 timer routing
-                        over the 8254 in addition to over the IO-APIC. The
-                        kernel tries to set a sensible default.
-
         hpet=           [X86-32,HPET] option to control HPET usage
                         Format: { enable (default) | disable | force }
                         disable: disable HPET and use PIT instead
@@ -657,11 +658,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         earlyprintk=    [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN]
                         earlyprintk=vga
                         earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
+                        earlyprintk=dbgp
 
                         Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console
                         takes over.
 
-                        Only vga or serial at a time, not both.
+                        Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time.
 
                         Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 are supported.
 
@@ -1018,6 +1020,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         (only serial suported for now)
                         Format: <serial_device>[,baud]
 
+        kmac=           [MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address.
+                        Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip
+                        Ethernet adapter MAC address.
+
         l2cr=           [PPC]
 
         l3cr=           [PPC]
@@ -1072,6 +1078,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
                         * [no]ncq: Turn on or off NCQ.
 
+                        * nohrst, nosrst, norst: suppress hard, soft
+                          and both resets.
+
                         If there are multiple matching configurations changing
                         the same attribute, the last one is used.
 
@@ -1223,6 +1232,29 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                                  or
                                  memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
 
+        memory_corruption_check=0/1 [X86]
+                        Some BIOSes seem to corrupt the first 64k of
+                        memory when doing things like suspend/resume.
+                        Setting this option will scan the memory
+                        looking for corruption.  Enabling this will
+                        both detect corruption and prevent the kernel
+                        from using the memory being corrupted.
+                        However, its intended as a diagnostic tool; if
+                        repeatable BIOS-originated corruption always
+                        affects the same memory, you can use memmap=
+                        to prevent the kernel from using that memory.
+
+        memory_corruption_check_size=size [X86]
+                        By default it checks for corruption in the low
+                        64k, making this memory unavailable for normal
+                        use.  Use this parameter to scan for
+                        corruption in more or less memory.
+
+        memory_corruption_check_period=seconds [X86]
+                        By default it checks for corruption every 60
+                        seconds.  Use this parameter to check at some
+                        other rate.  0 disables periodic checking.
+
         memtest=        [KNL,X86] Enable memtest
                         Format: <integer>
                         range: 0,4 : pattern number
@@ -1420,6 +1452,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         nolapic_timer   [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer.
 
+        nox2apic        [X86-64,APIC] Do not enable x2APIC mode.
+
+        x2apic_phys     [X86-64,APIC] Use x2apic physical mode instead of
+                        default x2apic cluster mode on platforms
+                        supporting x2apic.
+
         noltlbs         [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel
                         lowmem mapping on PPC40x.
 
@@ -1877,6 +1915,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         shapers=        [NET]
                         Maximal number of shapers.
 
+        show_msr=       [x86] show boot-time MSR settings
+                        Format: { <integer> }
+                        Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings.
+                        The parameter means the number of CPUs to show,
+                        for example 1 means boot CPU only.
+
         sim710=         [SCSI,HW]
                         See header of drivers/scsi/sim710.c.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 02dc748b76c4..71f0fe1fc1b0 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ detailed description):
         - LCD brightness control
         - Volume control
         - Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable
-        - Experimental: WAN enable and disable
+        - WAN enable and disable
 
 A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web
 site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure
@@ -1375,18 +1375,13 @@ with EINVAL, try to set pwm1_enable to 1 and pwm1 to at least 128 (255
 would be the safest choice, though).
 
 
-EXPERIMENTAL: WAN
------------------
+WAN
+---
 
 procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
 sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
 sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
 
-This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
-directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
-WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
-experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
-
 This feature shows the presence and current state of a W-WAN (Sierra
 Wireless EV-DO) device.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
index b88b0ea54e90..7228369d1014 100644
--- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
+++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
@@ -895,6 +895,9 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
         }
 }
 
+/* This is called when we no longer want to hear about Guest changes to a
+ * virtqueue.  This is more efficient in high-traffic cases, but it means we
+ * have to set a timer to check if any more changes have occurred. */
 static void block_vq(struct virtqueue *vq)
 {
         struct itimerval itm;
@@ -939,6 +942,11 @@ static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout)
         if (!timeout && num)
                 block_vq(vq);
 
+        /* We never quite know how long should we wait before we check the
+         * queue again for more packets.  We start at 500 microseconds, and if
+         * we get fewer packets than last time, we assume we made the timeout
+         * too small and increase it by 10 microseconds.  Otherwise, we drop it
+         * by one microsecond every time.  It seems to work well enough. */
         if (timeout) {
                 if (num < last_timeout_num)
                         timeout_usec += 10;
@@ -1447,21 +1455,6 @@ static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr)
                 err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", tapif);
 }
 
-static void get_mac(int fd, const char *tapif, unsigned char hwaddr[6])
-{
-        struct ifreq ifr;
-
-        memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr));
-        strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif);
-
-        /* SIOC stands for Socket I/O Control.  G means Get (vs S for Set
-         * above).  IF means Interface, and HWADDR is hardware address.
-         * Simple! */
-        if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) != 0)
-                err(1, "getting hw address for %s", tapif);
-        memcpy(hwaddr, ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data, 6);
-}
-
 static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ])
 {
         struct ifreq ifr;
@@ -1531,11 +1524,8 @@ static void setup_tun_net(char *arg)
         p = strchr(arg, ':');
         if (p) {
                 str2mac(p+1, conf.mac);
+                add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
                 *p = '\0';
-        } else {
-                p = arg + strlen(arg);
-                /* None supplied; query the randomly assigned mac. */
-                get_mac(ipfd, tapif, conf.mac);
         }
 
         /* arg is now either an IP address or a bridge name */
@@ -1547,13 +1537,10 @@ static void setup_tun_net(char *arg)
         /* Set up the tun device. */
         configure_device(ipfd, tapif, ip);
 
-        /* Tell Guest what MAC address to use. */
-        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY);
         /* Expect Guest to handle everything except UFO */
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM);
-        add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6);
         add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN);
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..123b6edd7f18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlge
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+Copyright (c)  2003-2008 QLogic Corporation
+QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver
+
+This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be
+distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file.
+You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the
+GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation (version 2 or a later version).
+
+You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file
+under the following terms:
+
+        1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable),
+           must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
+           conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+        2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above
+           copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
+           following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
+           materials provided with the distribution.
+
+        3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to
+           endorse or promote products derived from this software
+           without specific prior written permission
+
+REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE,
+THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
+BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
+ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT
+CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR
+OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT,
+TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN
+ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN
+COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6d8af1ac56c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := ifenslave
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
index 297ba7b1ccaf..2035bc4932f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -35,8 +35,9 @@ This file contains
     6.1 general settings
     6.2 local loopback of sent frames
     6.3 CAN controller hardware filters
-    6.4 currently supported CAN hardware
-    6.5 todo
+    6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
+    6.5 currently supported CAN hardware
+    6.6 todo
 
   7 Credits
 
@@ -584,7 +585,42 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
   @133MHz with four SJA1000 CAN controllers from 2002 under heavy bus
   load without any problems ...
 
-  6.4 currently supported CAN hardware (September 2007)
+  6.4 The virtual CAN driver (vcan)
+
+  Similar to the network loopback devices, vcan offers a virtual local
+  CAN interface. A full qualified address on CAN consists of
+
+  - a unique CAN Identifier (CAN ID)
+  - the CAN bus this CAN ID is transmitted on (e.g. can0)
+
+  so in common use cases more than one virtual CAN interface is needed.
+
+  The virtual CAN interfaces allow the transmission and reception of CAN
+  frames without real CAN controller hardware. Virtual CAN network
+  devices are usually named 'vcanX', like vcan0 vcan1 vcan2 ...
+  When compiled as a module the virtual CAN driver module is called vcan.ko
+
+  Since Linux Kernel version 2.6.24 the vcan driver supports the Kernel
+  netlink interface to create vcan network devices. The creation and
+  removal of vcan network devices can be managed with the ip(8) tool:
+
+  - Create a virtual CAN network interface:
+       ip link add type vcan
+
+  - Create a virtual CAN network interface with a specific name 'vcan42':
+       ip link add dev vcan42 type vcan
+
+  - Remove a (virtual CAN) network interface 'vcan42':
+       ip link del vcan42
+
+  The tool 'vcan' from the SocketCAN SVN repository on BerliOS is obsolete.
+
+  Virtual CAN network device creation in older Kernels:
+  In Linux Kernel versions < 2.6.24 the vcan driver creates 4 vcan
+  netdevices at module load time by default. This value can be changed
+  with the module parameter 'numdev'. E.g. 'modprobe vcan numdev=8'
+
+  6.5 currently supported CAN hardware
 
   On the project website http://developer.berlios.de/projects/socketcan
   there are different drivers available:
@@ -603,7 +639,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
 
   Please check the Mailing Lists on the berlios OSS project website.
 
-  6.5 todo (September 2007)
+  6.6 todo
 
   The configuration interface for CAN network drivers is still an open
   issue that has not been finalized in the socketcan project. Also the
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
index a12059886755..1b96ccda3836 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
@@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
 
                 }
 
-                ipaddr = ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data;
+                ipaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data;
                 v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n",
                         slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc,
                         ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]);
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
index d391ea631141..4caa0e314cc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
@@ -24,4 +24,56 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the
 device is still operational.  netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device
 comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.).
 
-Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com>
+
+Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices
+
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Currently two qdiscs are optimized for multiqueue devices.  The first is the
+default pfifo_fast qdisc.  This qdisc supports one qdisc per hardware queue.
+A new round-robin qdisc, sch_multiq also supports multiple hardware queues. The
+qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's and then directing the skb's to
+bands and queues based on the value in skb->queue_mapping.  Use this field in
+the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb to.
+
+sch_multiq has been added for hardware that wishes to avoid head-of-line
+blocking.  It will cycle though the bands and verify that the hardware queue
+associated with the band is not stopped prior to dequeuing a packet.
+
+On qdisc load, the number of bands is based on the number of queues on the
+hardware.  Once the association is made, any skb with skb->queue_mapping set,
+will be queued to the band associated with the hardware queue.
+
+
+Section 3: Brief howto using MULTIQ for multiqueue devices
+---------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure
+qdiscs.  To add the MULTIQ qdisc to your network device, assuming the device
+is called eth0, run the following command:
+
+# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: multiq
+
+The qdisc will allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that
+the device reports, and bring the qdisc online.  Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx
+queues, the band mapping would look like:
+
+band 0 => queue 0
+band 1 => queue 1
+band 2 => queue 2
+band 3 => queue 3
+
+Traffic will begin flowing through each queue based on either the simple_tx_hash
+function or based on netdev->select_queue() if you have it defined.
+
+The behavior of tc filters remains the same.  However a new tc action,
+skbedit, has been added.  Assuming you wanted to route all traffic to a
+specific host, for example 192.168.0.3, through a specific queue you could use
+this action and establish a filter such as:
+
+tc filter add dev eth0 parent 1: protocol ip prio 1 u32 \
+        match ip dst 192.168.0.3 \
+        action skbedit queue_mapping 3
+
+Author: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com>
+Original Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0e6e592f4f55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+Linux Phonet protocol family
+============================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+Phonet is a packet protocol used by Nokia cellular modems for both IPC
+and RPC. With the Linux Phonet socket family, Linux host processes can
+receive and send messages from/to the modem, or any other external
+device attached to the modem. The modem takes care of routing.
+
+Phonet packets can be exchanged through various hardware connections
+depending on the device, such as:
+  - USB with the CDC Phonet interface,
+  - infrared,
+  - Bluetooth,
+  - an RS232 serial port (with a dedicated "FBUS" line discipline),
+  - the SSI bus with some TI OMAP processors.
+
+
+Packets format
+--------------
+
+Phonet packets have a common header as follows:
+
+  struct phonethdr {
+    uint8_t  pn_media;  /* Media type (link-layer identifier) */
+    uint8_t  pn_rdev;   /* Receiver device ID */
+    uint8_t  pn_sdev;   /* Sender device ID */
+    uint8_t  pn_res;    /* Resource ID or function */
+    uint16_t pn_length; /* Big-endian message byte length (minus 6) */
+    uint8_t  pn_robj;   /* Receiver object ID */
+    uint8_t  pn_sobj;   /* Sender object ID */
+  };
+
+On Linux, the link-layer header includes the pn_media byte (see below).
+The next 7 bytes are part of the network-layer header.
+
+The device ID is split: the 6 higher-order bits consitute the device
+address, while the 2 lower-order bits are used for multiplexing, as are
+the 8-bit object identifiers. As such, Phonet can be considered as a
+network layer with 6 bits of address space and 10 bits for transport
+protocol (much like port numbers in IP world).
+
+The modem always has address number zero. All other device have a their
+own 6-bit address.
+
+
+Link layer
+----------
+
+Phonet links are always point-to-point links. The link layer header
+consists of a single Phonet media type byte. It uniquely identifies the
+link through which the packet is transmitted, from the modem's
+perspective. Each Phonet network device shall prepend and set the media
+type byte as appropriate. For convenience, a common phonet_header_ops
+link-layer header operations structure is provided. It sets the
+media type according to the network device hardware address.
+
+Linux Phonet network interfaces support a dedicated link layer packets
+type (ETH_P_PHONET) which is out of the Ethernet type range. They can
+only send and receive Phonet packets.
+
+The virtual TUN tunnel device driver can also be used for Phonet. This
+requires IFF_TUN mode, _without_ the IFF_NO_PI flag. In this case,
+there is no link-layer header, so there is no Phonet media type byte.
+
+Note that Phonet interfaces are not allowed to re-order packets, so
+only the (default) Linux FIFO qdisc should be used with them.
+
+
+Network layer
+-------------
+
+The Phonet socket address family maps the Phonet packet header:
+
+  struct sockaddr_pn {
+    sa_family_t spn_family;    /* AF_PHONET */
+    uint8_t     spn_obj;       /* Object ID */
+    uint8_t     spn_dev;       /* Device ID */
+    uint8_t     spn_resource;  /* Resource or function */
+    uint8_t     spn_zero[...]; /* Padding */
+  };
+
+The resource field is only used when sending and receiving;
+It is ignored by bind() and getsockname().
+
+
+Low-level datagram protocol
+---------------------------
+
+Applications can send Phonet messages using the Phonet datagram socket
+protocol from the PF_PHONET family. Each socket is bound to one of the
+2^10 object IDs available, and can send and receive packets with any
+other peer.
+
+  struct sockaddr_pn addr = { .spn_family = AF_PHONET, };
+  ssize_t len;
+  socklen_t addrlen = sizeof(addr);
+  int fd;
+
+  fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
+  bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr));
+  /* ... */
+
+  sendto(fd, msg, msglen, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr));
+  len = recvfrom(fd, buf, sizeof(buf), 0,
+                 (struct sockaddr *)&addr, &addrlen);
+
+This protocol follows the SOCK_DGRAM connection-less semantics.
+However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did
+not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily).
+
+
+Phonet Pipe protocol
+--------------------
+
+The Phonet Pipe protocol is a simple sequenced packets protocol
+with end-to-end congestion control. It uses the passive listening
+socket paradigm. The listening socket is bound to an unique free object
+ID. Each listening socket can handle up to 255 simultaneous
+connections, one per accept()'d socket.
+
+  int lfd, cfd;
+
+  lfd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE);
+  listen (lfd, INT_MAX);
+
+  /* ... */
+  cfd = accept(lfd, NULL, NULL);
+  for (;;)
+  {
+    char buf[...];
+    ssize_t len = read(cfd, buf, sizeof(buf));
+
+    /* ... */
+
+    write(cfd, msg, msglen);
+  }
+
+Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party"
+application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect()
+is not possible.
+
+WARNING:
+When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an
+intrinsic race condition whereby writability might be lost between the
+polling and the writing system calls. In this case, the socket will
+block until write because possible again, unless non-blocking mode
+becomes enabled.
+
+
+The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level:
+
+  PNPIPE_ENCAP accepts one integer value (int) of:
+
+    PNPIPE_ENCAP_NONE: The socket operates normally (default).
+
+    PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP: The socket is used as a backend for a virtual IP
+      interface. This requires CAP_NET_ADMIN capability. GPRS data
+      support on Nokia modems can use this. Note that the socket cannot
+      be reliably poll()'d or read() from while in this mode.
+
+  PNPIPE_IFINDEX is a read-only integer value. It contains the
+    interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP,
+    or zero if encapsulation is off.
+
+
+Authors
+-------
+
+Linux Phonet was initially written by Sakari Ailus.
+Other contributors include Mikä Liljeberg, Andras Domokos,
+Carlos Chinea and Rémi Denis-Courmont.
+Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a96989a8ff35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+Linux wireless regulatory documentation
+---------------------------------------
+
+This document gives a brief review over how the Linux wireless
+regulatory infrastructure works.
+
+More up to date information can be obtained at the project's web page:
+
+http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory
+
+Keeping regulatory domains in userspace
+---------------------------------------
+
+Due to the dynamic nature of regulatory domains we keep them
+in userspace and provide a framework for userspace to upload
+to the kernel one regulatory domain to be used as the central
+core regulatory domain all wireless devices should adhere to.
+
+How to get regulatory domains to the kernel
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Userspace gets a regulatory domain in the kernel by having
+a userspace agent build it and send it via nl80211. Only
+expected regulatory domains will be respected by the kernel.
+
+A currently available userspace agent which can accomplish this
+is CRDA - central regulatory domain agent. Its documented here:
+
+http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA
+
+Essentially the kernel will send a udev event when it knows
+it needs a new regulatory domain. A udev rule can be put in place
+to trigger crda to send the respective regulatory domain for a
+specific ISO/IEC 3166 alpha2.
+
+Below is an example udev rule which can be used:
+
+# Example file, should be put in /etc/udev/rules.d/regulatory.rules
+KERNEL=="regulatory*", ACTION=="change", SUBSYSTEM=="platform", RUN+="/sbin/crda"
+
+The alpha2 is passed as an environment variable under the variable COUNTRY.
+
+Who asks for regulatory domains?
+--------------------------------
+
+* Users
+
+Users can use iw:
+
+http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/iw
+
+An example:
+
+  # set regulatory domain to "Costa Rica"
+  iw reg set CR
+
+This will request the kernel to set the regulatory domain to
+the specificied alpha2. The kernel in turn will then ask userspace
+to provide a regulatory domain for the alpha2 specified by the user
+by sending a uevent.
+
+* Wireless subsystems for Country Information elements
+
+The kernel will send a uevent to inform userspace a new
+regulatory domain is required. More on this to be added
+as its integration is added.
+
+* Drivers
+
+If drivers determine they need a specific regulatory domain
+set they can inform the wireless core using regulatory_hint().
+They have two options -- they either provide an alpha2 so that
+crda can provide back a regulatory domain for that country or
+they can build their own regulatory domain based on internal
+custom knowledge so the wireless core can respect it.
+
+*Most* drivers will rely on the first mechanism of providing a
+regulatory hint with an alpha2. For these drivers there is an additional
+check that can be used to ensure compliance based on custom EEPROM
+regulatory data. This additional check can be used by drivers by
+registering on its struct wiphy a reg_notifier() callback. This notifier
+is called when the core's regulatory domain has been changed. The driver
+can use this to review the changes made and also review who made them
+(driver, user, country IE) and determine what to allow based on its
+internal EEPROM data. Devices drivers wishing to be capable of world
+roaming should use this callback. More on world roaming will be
+added to this document when its support is enabled.
+
+Device drivers who provide their own built regulatory domain
+do not need a callback as the channels registered by them are
+the only ones that will be allowed and therefore *additional*
+cannels cannot be enabled.
+
+Example code - drivers hinting an alpha2:
+------------------------------------------
+
+This example comes from the zd1211rw device driver. You can start
+by having a mapping of your device's EEPROM country/regulatory
+domain value to to a specific alpha2 as follows:
+
+static struct zd_reg_alpha2_map reg_alpha2_map[] = {
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FCC, "US" },
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_IC, "CA" },
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_ETSI, "DE" }, /* Generic ETSI, use most restrictive */
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN, "JP" },
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_JAPAN_ADD, "JP" },
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_SPAIN, "ES" },
+        { ZD_REGDOMAIN_FRANCE, "FR" },
+
+Then you can define a routine to map your read EEPROM value to an alpha2,
+as follows:
+
+static int zd_reg2alpha2(u8 regdomain, char *alpha2)
+{
+        unsigned int i;
+        struct zd_reg_alpha2_map *reg_map;
+                for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(reg_alpha2_map); i++) {
+                        reg_map = &reg_alpha2_map[i];
+                        if (regdomain == reg_map->reg) {
+                        alpha2[0] = reg_map->alpha2[0];
+                        alpha2[1] = reg_map->alpha2[1];
+                        return 0;
+                }
+        }
+        return 1;
+}
+
+Lastly, you can then hint to the core of your discovered alpha2, if a match
+was found. You need to do this after you have registered your wiphy. You
+are expected to do this during initialization.
+
+        r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2);
+        if (!r)
+                regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL);
+
+Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain:
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your
+driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain
+structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should
+kmalloc() a structure big enough to hold your regulatory domain
+structure and you should then fill it with your data. Finally you simply
+call regulatory_hint() with the regulatory domain structure in it.
+
+Bellow is a simple example, with a regulatory domain cached using the stack.
+Your implementation may vary (read EEPROM cache instead, for example).
+
+Example cache of some regulatory domain
+
+struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = {
+        .n_reg_rules = 3,
+        .alpha2 =  "JP",
+        //.alpha2 =  "99", /* If I have no alpha2 to map it to */
+        .reg_rules = {
+                /* IEEE 802.11b/g, channels 1..14 */
+                REG_RULE(2412-20, 2484+20, 40, 6, 20, 0),
+                /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 34..48 */
+                REG_RULE(5170-20, 5240+20, 40, 6, 20,
+                        NL80211_RRF_PASSIVE_SCAN),
+                /* IEEE 802.11a, channels 52..64 */
+                REG_RULE(5260-20, 5320+20, 40, 6, 20,
+                        NL80211_RRF_NO_IBSS |
+                        NL80211_RRF_DFS),
+        }
+};
+
+Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered:
+
+        int r;
+        struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd;
+        int size_of_regd;
+        int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules;
+        unsigned int i;
+
+        size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) +
+                (num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
+
+        rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL);
+        if (!rd)
+        return -ENOMEM;
+
+        memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain));
+
+        for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) {
+                memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i],
+                        sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
+        }
+        r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd);
+        if (r) {
+                kfree(rd);
+                return r;
+        }
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7b5996d9357e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+Transparent proxy support
+=========================
+
+This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels.
+To use it, enable NETFILTER_TPROXY, the socket match and the TPROXY target in
+your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that
+as well.
+
+
+1. Making non-local sockets work
+================================
+
+The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local
+socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that
+value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally:
+
+# iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT
+# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT
+# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1
+# iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT
+
+# ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100
+# ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100
+
+Because of certain restrictions in the IPv4 routing output code you'll have to
+modify your application to allow it to send datagrams _from_ non-local IP
+addresses. All you have to do is enable the (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) socket
+option before calling bind:
+
+fd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
+/* - 8< -*/
+int value = 1;
+setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT, &value, sizeof(value));
+/* - 8< -*/
+name.sin_family = AF_INET;
+name.sin_port = htons(0xCAFE);
+name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(0xDEADBEEF);
+bind(fd, &name, sizeof(name));
+
+A trivial patch for netcat is available here:
+http://people.netfilter.org/hidden/tproxy/netcat-ip_transparent-support.patch
+
+
+2. Redirecting traffic
+======================
+
+Transparent proxying often involves "intercepting" traffic on a router. This is
+usually done with the iptables REDIRECT target; however, there are serious
+limitations of that method. One of the major issues is that it actually
+modifies the packets to change the destination address -- which might not be
+acceptable in certain situations. (Think of proxying UDP for example: you won't
+be able to find out the original destination address. Even in case of TCP
+getting the original destination address is racy.)
+
+The 'TPROXY' target provides similar functionality without relying on NAT. Simply
+add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above:
+
+# iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \
+  --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080
+
+Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP,
+IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket.
+
+
+3. Iptables extensions
+======================
+
+To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules
+compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available
+here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git
+
+
+4. Application support
+======================
+
+4.1. Squid
+----------
+
+Squid 3.HEAD has support built-in. To use it, pass
+'--enable-linux-netfilter' to configure and set the 'tproxy' option on
+the HTTP listener you redirect traffic to with the TPROXY iptables
+target.
+
+For more information please consult the following page on the Squid
+wiki: http://wiki.squid-cache.org/Features/Tproxy4
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..accde871ae77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := crc32hash
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_crc32hash.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
index cbc36d299af8..4210e5abab8a 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) {
                 printf("no string passed as argument\n");
                 return -1;
         }
-        result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
+        result = crc32((unsigned char const *)argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
         printf("0x%x\n", result);
         return 0;
 }
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
index 49adb1a33514..c40866e8b957 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-PM quality of Service interface.
+PM Quality Of Service Interface.
 
 This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering
 performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on
@@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ one of the parameters.
 Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the
 initial set of pm_qos parameters.
 
+Each parameters have defined units:
+ * latency: usec
+ * timeout: usec
+ * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec)
+
 The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented
 parameter.  The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init()
 and pm_qos_params.h.  This is done because having the available parameters
diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
index a8686e5a6857..c6cd4956047c 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
@@ -101,6 +101,10 @@ of charge when battery became full/empty". It also could mean "value of
 charge when battery considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature,
 age)". I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values.
 
+CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh).  This could easily
+be negative; there is no empty or full value.  It is only useful for
+relative, time-based measurements.
+
 ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy.
 
 CAPACITY - capacity in percents.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..82b7a43aadba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+Regulator Consumer Driver Interface
+===================================
+
+This text describes the regulator interface for consumer device drivers.
+Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text.
+
+
+1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers)
+=======================================================
+
+A consumer driver can get access to it's supply regulator by calling :-
+
+regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");
+
+The consumer passes in it's struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core
+then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table.
+If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct
+regulator that supplies this consumer.
+
+To release the regulator the consumer driver should call :-
+
+regulator_put(regulator);
+
+Consumers can be supplied by more than one regulator e.g. codec consumer with
+analog and digital supplies :-
+
+digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");  /* digital core */
+analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd");  /* analog */
+
+The regulator access functions regulator_get() and regulator_put() will
+usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively.
+
+
+2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers)
+====================================================================
+
+A consumer can enable it's power supply by calling:-
+
+int regulator_enable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called.
+This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been
+previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code.
+
+A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling :-
+
+int regulator_is_enabled(regulator);
+
+This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled.
+
+
+A consumer can disable it's supply when no longer needed by calling :-
+
+int regulator_disable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The
+regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero.
+
+Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency :-
+
+int regulator_force_disable(regulator);
+
+NOTE: this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All
+consumers will be powered off.
+
+
+3. Regulator Voltage Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+======================================================
+
+Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
+voltage to match system operating points. e.g. CPUfreq drivers can scale
+voltage along with frequency to save power, SD drivers may need to select the
+correct card voltage, etc.
+
+Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
+
+Where min_uV and max_uV are the minimum and maximum acceptable voltages in
+microvolts.
+
+NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
+when enabled, then the voltage changes instantly, otherwise the voltage
+configuration changes and the voltage is physically set when the regulator is
+next enabled.
+
+The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling :-
+
+int regulator_get_voltage(regulator);
+
+NOTE: get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the
+regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator
+output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to
+determine the regulator physical output voltage.
+
+
+4. Regulator Current Limit Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+===========================================================
+
+Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
+current limit to match system operating points. e.g. LCD backlight driver can
+change the current limit to vary the backlight brightness, USB drivers may want
+to set the limit to 500mA when supplying power.
+
+Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
+
+Where min_uA and max_uA are the minimum and maximum acceptable current limit in
+microamps.
+
+NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
+when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current
+limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the
+regulator is next enabled.
+
+A regulators current limit can be found by calling :-
+
+int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator);
+
+NOTE: get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator
+is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current
+load.
+
+
+5. Regulator Operating Mode Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
+=============================================================
+
+Some consumers can further save system power by changing the operating mode of
+their supply regulator to be more efficient when the consumers operating state
+changes. e.g. consumer driver is idle and subsequently draws less current
+
+Regulator operating mode can be changed indirectly or directly.
+
+Indirect operating mode control.
+--------------------------------
+Consumer drivers can request a change in their supply regulator operating mode
+by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_optimum_mode(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA);
+
+This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based
+on all it's consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted)
+to best match the current operating load.
+
+The load_uA value can be determined from the consumers datasheet. e.g.most
+datasheets have tables showing the max current consumed in certain situations.
+
+Most consumers will use indirect operating mode control since they have no
+knowledge of the regulator or whether the regulator is shared with other
+consumers.
+
+Direct operating mode control.
+------------------------------
+Bespoke or tightly coupled drivers may want to directly control regulator
+operating mode depending on their operating point. This can be achieved by
+calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode);
+unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator);
+
+Direct mode will only be used by consumers that *know* about the regulator and
+are not sharing the regulator with other consumers.
+
+
+6. Regulator Events
+===================
+Regulators can notify consumers of external events. Events could be received by
+consumers under regulator stress or failure conditions.
+
+Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling :-
+
+int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+                              struct notifier_block *nb);
+
+Consumers can uregister interest by calling :-
+
+int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+                                struct notifier_block *nb);
+
+Regulators use the kernel notifier framework to send event to thier interested
+consumers.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c9a35665cf70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+Regulator Machine Driver Interface
+===================================
+
+The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific
+initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that
+machine drivers would do are :-
+
+ 1. Regulator -> Device mapping.
+ 2. Regulator supply configuration.
+ 3. Power Domain constraint setting.
+
+
+
+1. Regulator -> device mapping
+==============================
+Consider the following machine :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in
+order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine
+initialisation code by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev,
+                                const char *supply);
+
+and is shown with the following code :-
+
+regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc");
+regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc");
+
+This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2
+to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A.
+
+
+2. Regulator supply configuration.
+==================================
+Consider the following machine (again) :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered
+with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's
+supply (Regulator-2).
+
+This relationship can be register with the core via :-
+
+int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply);
+
+In this example we would use the following code :-
+
+regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1");
+
+Relationships can be queried by calling :-
+
+const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator);
+
+
+3. Power Domain constraint setting.
+===================================
+Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and
+current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always
+operated within specifications.
+
+Consider the following machine (again) :-
+
+  Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
+               |
+               +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V]
+
+This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
+                   Domain 2: Consumer A.
+
+Constraints can be registered by calling :-
+
+int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator,
+        struct regulation_constraints *constraints);
+
+The example is defined as follows :-
+
+struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = {
+        .min_uV = 3300000,
+        .max_uV = 3300000,
+        .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
+};
+
+struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = {
+        .min_uV = 1800000,
+        .max_uV = 2000000,
+        .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE,
+        .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL,
+};
+
+regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1);
+regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bdcb332bd7fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+Linux voltage and current regulator framework
+=============================================
+
+About
+=====
+
+This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control
+voltage and current regulators.
+
+The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control regulator power output
+in order to save power and prolong battery life. This applies to both voltage
+regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where
+current limit is controllable).
+
+(C) 2008  Wolfson Microelectronics PLC.
+Author: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com>
+
+
+Nomenclature
+============
+
+Some terms used in this document:-
+
+  o Regulator    - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices.
+                   Most regulators can enable and disable their output whilst
+                   some can control their output voltage and or current.
+
+                   Input Voltage -> Regulator -> Output Voltage
+
+
+  o PMIC         - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous regulators
+                   and often contains other susbsystems.
+
+
+  o Consumer     - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator.
+                   Consumers can be classified into two types:-
+
+                   Static: consumer does not change it's supply voltage or
+                   current limit. It only needs to enable or disable it's
+                   power supply. It's supply voltage is set by the hardware,
+                   bootloader, firmware or kernel board initialisation code.
+
+                   Dynamic: consumer needs to change it's supply voltage or
+                   current limit to meet operation demands.
+
+
+  o Power Domain - Electronic circuit that is supplied it's input power by the
+                   output power of a regulator, switch or by another power
+                   domain.
+
+                   The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e.
+
+                   Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A]
+                              |             |
+                              |             +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C]
+                              |
+                              +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E]
+
+                   That is one regulator and three power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E.
+                   Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C.
+                   Domain 3: Consumer A.
+
+                   and this represents a "supplies" relationship:
+
+                   Domain-1 --> Domain-2 --> Domain-3.
+
+                   A power domain may have regulators that are supplied power
+                   by other regulators. i.e.
+
+                   Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A]
+                                |
+                                +-> [Consumer B]
+
+                   This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
+
+                   Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
+                   Domain 2: Consumer A.
+
+                   and a "supplies" relationship:
+
+                   Domain-1 --> Domain-2
+
+
+  o Constraints  - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance
+                   and hardware protection. Constraints exist at three levels:
+
+                   Regulator Level: This is defined by the regulator hardware
+                   operating parameters and is specified in the regulator
+                   datasheet. i.e.
+
+                     - voltage output is in the range 800mV -> 3500mV.
+                     - regulator current output limit is 20mA @ 5V but is
+                       10mA @ 10V.
+
+                   Power Domain Level: This is defined in software by kernel
+                   level board initialisation code. It is used to constrain a
+                   power domain to a particular power range. i.e.
+
+                     - Domain-1 voltage is 3300mV
+                     - Domain-2 voltage is 1400mV -> 1600mV
+                     - Domain-3 current limit is 0mA -> 20mA.
+
+                   Consumer Level: This is defined by consumer drivers
+                   dynamically setting voltage or current limit levels.
+
+                   e.g. a consumer backlight driver asks for a current increase
+                   from 5mA to 10mA to increase LCD illumination. This passes
+                   to through the levels as follows :-
+
+                   Consumer: need to increase LCD brightness. Lookup and
+                   request next current mA value in brightness table (the
+                   consumer driver could be used on several different
+                   personalities based upon the same reference device).
+
+                   Power Domain: is the new current limit within the domain
+                   operating limits for this domain and system state (e.g.
+                   battery power, USB power)
+
+                   Regulator Domains: is the new current limit within the
+                   regulator operating parameters for input/ouput voltage.
+
+                   If the regulator request passes all the constraint tests
+                   then the new regulator value is applied.
+
+
+Design
+======
+
+The framework is designed and targeted at SoC based devices but may also be
+relevant to non SoC devices and is split into the following four interfaces:-
+
+
+   1. Consumer driver interface.
+
+      This uses a similar API to the kernel clock interface in that consumer
+      drivers can get and put a regulator (like they can with clocks atm) and
+      get/set voltage, current limit, mode, enable and disable. This should
+      allow consumers complete control over their supply voltage and current
+      limit. This also compiles out if not in use so drivers can be reused in
+      systems with no regulator based power control.
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
+
+   2. Regulator driver interface.
+
+      This allows regulator drivers to register their regulators and provide
+      operations to the core. It also has a notifier call chain for propagating
+      regulator events to clients.
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
+
+   3. Machine interface.
+
+      This interface is for machine specific code and allows the creation of
+      voltage/current domains (with constraints) for each regulator. It can
+      provide regulator constraints that will prevent device damage through
+      overvoltage or over current caused by buggy client drivers. It also
+      allows the creation of a regulator tree whereby some regulators are
+      supplied by others (similar to a clock tree).
+
+        See Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
+
+   4. Userspace ABI.
+
+      The framework also exports a lot of useful voltage/current/opmode data to
+      userspace via sysfs. This could be used to help monitor device power
+      consumption and status.
+
+        See Documentation/ABI/testing/regulator-sysfs.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a69050143592
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Regulator Driver Interface
+==========================
+
+The regulator driver interface is relatively simple and designed to allow
+regulator drivers to register their services with the core framework.
+
+
+Registration
+============
+
+Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
+
+struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
+                                          void *reg_data);
+
+This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator
+core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver).
+
+Regulators can be unregistered by calling :-
+
+void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev);
+
+
+Regulator Events
+================
+Regulators can send events (e.g. over temp, under voltage, etc) to consumer
+drivers by calling :-
+
+int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev,
+                                  unsigned long event, void *data);
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
index 3be84aa38dfe..29d839ce7327 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
@@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
         - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
 ppc_htab.txt
         - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry
-SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
-        - EST SBC8260 board info
 smp.txt
         - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
 sound.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e6e9ee0506c3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,197 +0,0 @@
-Please mail me (Jon Diekema, diekema_jon@si.com or diekema@cideas.com)
-if you have questions, comments or corrections.
-
-        * EST SBC8260 Linux memory mapping rules
-
-        http://www.estc.com/ 
-        http://www.estc.com/products/boards/SBC8260-8240_ds.html
-
-        Initial conditions:
-        -------------------
-        
-        Tasks that need to be perform by the boot ROM before control is
-        transferred to zImage (compressed Linux kernel):
-
-        - Define the IMMR to 0xf0000000
-
-        - Initialize the memory controller so that RAM is available at
-          physical address 0x00000000.  On the SBC8260 is this 16M (64M)
-          SDRAM.
-
-        - The boot ROM should only clear the RAM that it is using.
-
-          The reason for doing this is to enhances the chances of a
-          successful post mortem on a Linux panic.  One of the first
-          items to examine is the 16k (LOG_BUF_LEN) circular console
-          buffer called log_buf which is defined in kernel/printk.c.
-
-        - To enhance boot ROM performance, the I-cache can be enabled.
-
-          Date: Mon, 22 May 2000 14:21:10 -0700
-          From: Neil Russell <caret@c-side.com>
-
-          LiMon (LInux MONitor) runs with and starts Linux with MMU
-          off, I-cache enabled, D-cache disabled.  The I-cache doesn't
-          need hints from the MMU to work correctly as the D-cache
-          does.  No D-cache means no special code to handle devices in
-          the presence of cache (no snooping, etc). The use of the
-          I-cache means that the monitor can run acceptably fast
-          directly from ROM, rather than having to copy it to RAM.
-
-        - Build the board information structure (see 
-          include/asm-ppc/est8260.h for its definition)
-
-        - The compressed Linux kernel (zImage) contains a bootstrap loader 
-          that is position independent; you can load it into any RAM, 
-          ROM or FLASH memory address >= 0x00500000 (above 5 MB), or
-          at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB).
-
-          Note: If zImage is loaded at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB),
-                then zImage will skip the step of moving itself to 
-                its link address.
-
-        - Load R3 with the address of the board information structure
-
-        - Transfer control to zImage
-
-        - The Linux console port is SMC1, and the baud rate is controlled
-          from the bi_baudrate field of the board information structure.
-          On thing to keep in mind when picking the baud rate, is that
-          there is no flow control on the SMC ports.  I would stick
-          with something safe and standard like 19200.
-
-          On the EST SBC8260, the SMC1 port is on the COM1 connector of
-          the board.
-
-        
-        EST SBC8260 defaults:
-        ---------------------
-
-                                Chip
-        Memory                  Sel  Bus   Use
-        ---------------------   ---  ---   ----------------------------------
-        0x00000000-0x03FFFFFF   CS2  60x   (16M or 64M)/64M SDRAM
-        0x04000000-0x04FFFFFF   CS4  local  4M/16M SDRAM (soldered to the board)
-        0x21000000-0x21000000   CS7  60x    1B/64K Flash present detect (from the flash SIMM)
-        0x21000001-0x21000001   CS7  60x    1B/64K Switches (read) and LEDs (write)
-        0x22000000-0x2200FFFF   CS5  60x    8K/64K EEPROM
-        0xFC000000-0xFCFFFFFF   CS6  60x    2M/16M flash (8 bits wide, soldered to the board)
-        0xFE000000-0xFFFFFFFF   CS0  60x    4M/16M flash (SIMM)
-
-        Notes:
-        ------
-
-        - The chip selects can map 32K blocks and up (powers of 2)
-
-        - The SDRAM machine can handled up to 128Mbytes per chip select
-
-        - Linux uses the 60x bus memory (the SDRAM DIMM) for the 
-          communications buffers.
-
-        - BATs can map 128K-256Mbytes each.  There are four data BATs and
-          four instruction BATs.  Generally the data and instruction BATs
-          are mapped the same.
-
-        - The IMMR must be set above the kernel virtual memory addresses,
-          which start at 0xC0000000.  Otherwise, the kernel may crash as
-          soon as you start any threads or processes due to VM collisions 
-          in the kernel or user process space.
-
-
-          Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 10/29/1999:
-
-          The user application virtual space consumes the first 2 Gbytes
-          (0x00000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF).  The kernel virtual text starts at
-          0xC0000000, with data following.  There is a "protection hole"
-          between the end of kernel data and the start of the kernel
-          dynamically allocated space, but this space is still within
-          0xCxxxxxxx.
-
-          Obviously the kernel can't map any physical addresses 1:1 in
-          these ranges.
-
-
-          Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 5/19/2000:
-
-          During the early kernel initialization, the kernel virtual
-          memory allocator is not operational.  Prior to this KVM
-          initialization, we choose to map virtual to physical addresses
-          1:1.  That is, the kernel virtual address exactly matches the
-          physical address on the bus.  These mappings are typically done
-          in arch/ppc/kernel/head.S, or arch/ppc/mm/init.c.  Only
-          absolutely necessary mappings should be done at this time, for
-          example board control registers or a serial uart.  Normal device
-          driver initialization should map resources later when necessary.
-
-          Although platform dependent, and certainly the case for embedded
-          8xx, traditionally memory is mapped at physical address zero,
-          and I/O devices above physical address 0x80000000.  The lowest
-          and highest (above 0xf0000000) I/O addresses are traditionally 
-          used for devices or registers we need to map during kernel 
-          initialization and prior to KVM operation.  For this reason, 
-          and since it followed prior PowerPC platform examples, I chose 
-          to map the embedded 8xx kernel to the 0xc0000000 virtual address.
-          This way, we can enable the MMU to map the kernel for proper 
-          operation, and still map a few windows before the KVM is operational.
-
-          On some systems, you could possibly run the kernel at the 
-          0x80000000 or any other virtual address.  It just depends upon 
-          mapping that must be done prior to KVM operational.  You can never 
-          map devices or kernel spaces that overlap with the user virtual 
-          space.  This is why default IMMR mapping used by most BDM tools 
-          won't work.  They put the IMMR at something like 0x10000000 or 
-          0x02000000 for example.  You simply can't map these addresses early
-          in the kernel, and continue proper system operation.
-
-          The embedded 8xx/82xx kernel is mature enough that all you should 
-          need to do is map the IMMR someplace at or above 0xf0000000 and it 
-          should boot far enough to get serial console messages and KGDB 
-          connected on any platform.  There are lots of other subtle memory 
-          management design features that you simply don't need to worry 
-          about.  If you are changing functions related to MMU initialization,
-          you are likely breaking things that are known to work and are 
-          heading down a path of disaster and frustration.  Your changes 
-          should be to make the flexibility of the processor fit Linux, 
-          not force arbitrary and non-workable memory mappings into Linux.
-
-        - You don't want to change KERNELLOAD or KERNELBASE, otherwise the
-          virtual memory and MMU code will get confused.
-        
-          arch/ppc/Makefile:KERNELLOAD = 0xc0000000
-
-          include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define PAGE_OFFSET    0xc0000000
-          include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define KERNELBASE     PAGE_OFFSET
-
-        - RAM is at physical address 0x00000000, and gets mapped to 
-          virtual address 0xC0000000 for the kernel.
-
-
-        Physical addresses used by the Linux kernel:
-        --------------------------------------------
-
-        0x00000000-0x3FFFFFFF   1GB reserved for RAM
-        0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF   128K IMMR  64K used for dual port memory,
-                                 64K for 8260 registers
-
-        
-        Logical addresses used by the Linux kernel:
-        -------------------------------------------
-
-        0xF0000000-0xFFFFFFFF   256M BAT0 (IMMR: dual port RAM, registers)
-        0xE0000000-0xEFFFFFFF   256M BAT1 (I/O space for custom boards)
-        0xC0000000-0xCFFFFFFF   256M BAT2 (RAM)
-        0xD0000000-0xDFFFFFFF   256M BAT3 (if RAM > 256MByte)
-
-
-        EST SBC8260 Linux mapping:
-        --------------------------
-
-        DBAT0, IBAT0, cache inhibited:
-
-                                Chip
-        Memory                  Sel  Use
-        ---------------------   ---  ---------------------------------
-        0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF   n/a  IMMR: dual port RAM, registers
-
-        DBAT1, IBAT1, cache inhibited:
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
index 928a79ceb7aa..de4063cb4fdc 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ it with special cases.
         a 64-bit platform.
 
         d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_*
-        constants in include/asm-powerpc/processor.h
+        constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h
 
 32-bit embedded kernels:
 
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel.
 ---------
 
    The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is
-   roughly described in include/asm-powerpc/prom.h by the structure
+   roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure
    boot_param_header:
 
 struct boot_param_header {
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
index b35f3482e3e4..2ea76d9d137c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,15 @@ Currently defined compatibles:
 - fsl,cpm2-scc-uart
 - fsl,qe-uart
 
+Modem control lines connected to GPIO controllers are listed in the gpios
+property as described in booting-without-of.txt, section IX.1 in the following
+order:
+
+CTS, RTS, DCD, DSR, DTR, and RI.
+
+The gpios property is optional and can be left out when control lines are
+not used.
+
 Example:
 
         serial@11a00 {
@@ -18,4 +27,6 @@ Example:
                 interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
                 fsl,cpm-brg = <1>;
                 fsl,cpm-command = <00800000>;
+                gpios = <&gpio_c 15 0
+                         &gpio_d 29 0>;
         };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
index df7afe43d462..9d4e33df624c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ error.  Given an arbitrary address, the routine
 pci_get_device_by_addr() will find the pci device associated
 with that address (if any).
 
-The default include/asm-powerpc/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(),
+The default arch/powerpc/include/asm/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(),
 etc. include a check to see if the i/o read returned all-0xff's.
 If so, these make a call to eeh_dn_check_failure(), which in turn
 asks the firmware if the all-ff's value is the sign of a true EEH
diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
index 0843ed0163a5..b65f0799df48 100644
--- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
@@ -341,6 +341,8 @@ key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific
 3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers
 ------------------------------------------
 
+(in this text, rfkill->foo means the foo field of struct rfkill).
+
 1. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one
 transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it.
 
@@ -363,6 +365,33 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set,
 when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill
 line.
 
+5. The wireless device driver MUST NOT leave the transmitter enabled during
+suspend and hibernation unless:
+
+        5.1. The transmitter has to be enabled for some sort of functionality
+        like wake-on-wireless-packet or autonomous packed forwarding in a mesh
+        network, and that functionality is enabled for this suspend/hibernation
+        cycle.
+
+AND
+
+        5.2. The device was not on a user-requested BLOCKED state before
+        the suspend (i.e. the driver must NOT unblock a device, not even
+        to support wake-on-wireless-packet or remain in the mesh).
+
+In other words, there is absolutely no allowed scenario where a driver can
+automatically take action to unblock a rfkill controller (obviously, this deals
+with scenarios where soft-blocking or both soft and hard blocking is happening.
+Scenarios where hardware rfkill lines are the only ones blocking the
+transmitter are outside of this rule, since the wireless device driver does not
+control its input hardware rfkill lines in the first place).
+
+6. During resume, rfkill will try to restore its previous state.
+
+7. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call rfkill->toggle_radio
+until it is resumed.
+
+
 Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem:
 --------------------------------------------------------------------
 
@@ -390,9 +419,10 @@ rfkill lines are inactive, it must return RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED if its soft
 rfkill input line is active.  Only if none of the rfkill input lines are
 active, will it return RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
 
-If it doesn't implement the get_state() hook, it must make sure that its calls
-to rfkill_force_state() are enough to keep the status always up-to-date, and it
-must do a rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep.
+Since the device has a hardware rfkill line, it IS subject to state changes
+external to rfkill.  Therefore, the driver must make sure that it calls
+rfkill_force_state() to keep the status always up-to-date, and it must do a
+rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep.
 
 Every time the driver gets a notification from the card that one of its rfkill
 lines changed state (polling might be needed on badly designed cards that don't
@@ -422,13 +452,24 @@ of the hardware is unknown), or read-write (where the hardware can be queried
 about its current state).
 
 The rfkill class will call the get_state hook of a device every time it needs
-to know the *real* current state of the hardware.  This can happen often.
+to know the *real* current state of the hardware.  This can happen often, but
+it does not do any polling, so it is not enough on hardware that is subject
+to state changes outside of the rfkill subsystem.
+
+Therefore, calling rfkill_force_state() when a state change happens is
+mandatory when the device has a hardware rfkill line, or when something else
+like the firmware could cause its state to be changed without going through the
+rfkill class.
 
 Some hardware provides events when its status changes.  In these cases, it is
 best for the driver to not provide a get_state hook, and instead register the
 rfkill class *already* with the correct status, and keep it updated using
 rfkill_force_state() when it gets an event from the hardware.
 
+rfkill_force_state() must be used on the device resume handlers to update the
+rfkill status, should there be any chance of the device status changing during
+the sleep.
+
 There is no provision for a statically-allocated rfkill struct.  You must
 use rfkill_allocate() to allocate one.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
index bf0baa19ec24..339207d11d95 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
+++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
@@ -70,13 +70,19 @@ Command line parameters
 
   Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be
         ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device
-        disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored.
+        disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make
+        known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below).
 
   For example,
         "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore"
   will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored
   devices.
 
+  You can remove already known but now ignored devices via
+        "echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore"
+  All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use)
+  will be deregistered and thus removed from the system.
+
   The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward
   compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device
   numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd.
@@ -98,8 +104,7 @@ debugfs entries
     handling).
 
   - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf
-    Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages
-    printed when cio_msg=yes.
+    Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer.
 
   - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii
     Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, 
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
index 88bcb8767335..9d8eb553884c 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
@@ -1,151 +1,242 @@
+                      =============
+                      CFS Scheduler
+                      =============
 
-This is the CFS scheduler.
-
-80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically
-models an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware.
-
-"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent  :-))  CPU that has 100%
-physical power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in
-parallel, each at 1/nr_running speed. For example: if there are 2 tasks
-running then it runs each at 50% physical power - totally in parallel.
-
-On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so while that
-one task runs, the other tasks that are waiting for the CPU are at a
-disadvantage - the current task gets an unfair amount of CPU time. In
-CFS this fairness imbalance is expressed and tracked via the per-task
-p->wait_runtime (nanosec-unit) value. "wait_runtime" is the amount of
-time the task should now run on the CPU for it to become completely fair
-and balanced.
-
-( small detail: on 'ideal' hardware, the p->wait_runtime value would
-  always be zero - no task would ever get 'out of balance' from the
-  'ideal' share of CPU time. )
-
-CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->wait_runtime value and it
-is thus very simple: it always tries to run the task with the largest
-p->wait_runtime value. In other words, CFS tries to run the task with
-the 'gravest need' for more CPU time. So CFS always tries to split up
-CPU time between runnable tasks as close to 'ideal multitasking
-hardware' as possible.
-
-Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple
-concept, with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels,
-multiprocessing and various algorithm variants to recognize sleepers.
-
-In practice it works like this: the system runs a task a bit, and when
-the task schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is
-'accounted for': the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU
-is deducted from p->wait_runtime. [minus the 'fair share' it would have
-gotten anyway]. Once p->wait_runtime gets low enough so that another
-task becomes the 'leftmost task' of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains
-(plus a small amount of 'granularity' distance relative to the leftmost
-task so that we do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache) then the
-new leftmost task is picked and the current task is preempted.
-
-The rq->fair_clock value tracks the 'CPU time a runnable task would have
-fairly gotten, had it been runnable during that time'. So by using
-rq->fair_clock values we can accurately timestamp and measure the
-'expected CPU time' a task should have gotten. All runnable tasks are
-sorted in the rbtree by the "rq->fair_clock - p->wait_runtime" key, and
-CFS picks the 'leftmost' task and sticks to it. As the system progresses
-forwards, newly woken tasks are put into the tree more and more to the
-right - slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the
-'leftmost task' and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic amount of
-time.
-
-Some implementation details:
-
- - the introduction of Scheduling Classes: an extensible hierarchy of
-   scheduler modules. These modules encapsulate scheduling policy
-   details and are handled by the scheduler core without the core
-   code assuming about them too much.
-
- - sched_fair.c implements the 'CFS desktop scheduler': it is a
-   replacement for the vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity
-   code.
-
-   I'd like to give credit to Con Kolivas for the general approach here:
-   he has proven via RSDL/SD that 'fair scheduling' is possible and that
-   it results in better desktop scheduling. Kudos Con!
-
-   The CFS patch uses a completely different approach and implementation
-   from RSDL/SD. My goal was to make CFS's interactivity quality exceed
-   that of RSDL/SD, which is a high standard to meet :-) Testing
-   feedback is welcome to decide this one way or another. [ and, in any
-   case, all of SD's logic could be added via a kernel/sched_sd.c module
-   as well, if Con is interested in such an approach. ]
-
-   CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use runqueues, it uses a
-   time-ordered rbtree to build a 'timeline' of future task execution,
-   and thus has no 'array switch' artifacts (by which both the vanilla
-   scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected).
-
-   CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any
-   jiffies or other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of
-   'timeslices' and has no heuristics whatsoever. There is only one
-   central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG):
-
-         /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns
-
-   which can be used to tune the scheduler from 'desktop' (low
-   latencies) to 'server' (good batching) workloads. It defaults to a
-   setting suitable for desktop workloads. SCHED_BATCH is handled by the
-   CFS scheduler module too.
-
-   Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the
-   'attacks' that exist today against the heuristics of the stock
-   scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c, chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all
-   work fine and do not impact interactivity and produce the expected
-   behavior.
-
-   the CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and
-   SCHED_BATCH: both types of workloads should be isolated much more
-   agressively than under the vanilla scheduler.
-
-   ( another detail: due to nanosec accounting and timeline sorting,
-     sched_yield() support is very simple under CFS, and in fact under
-     CFS sched_yield() behaves much better than under any other
-     scheduler i have tested so far. )
-
- - sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler
-   way than the vanilla scheduler does. It uses 100 runqueues (for all
-   100 RT priority levels, instead of 140 in the vanilla scheduler)
-   and it needs no expired array.
-
- - reworked/sanitized SMP load-balancing: the runqueue-walking
-   assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and
-   iterators of the scheduling modules are used. The balancing code got
-   quite a bit simpler as a result.
-
-
-Group scheduler extension to CFS
-================================
-
-Normally the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide
-fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks
-and provide fair CPU time to each such task group. For example, it may
-be desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system
-and then to each task belonging to a user.
-
-CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that. It lets
-SCHED_NORMAL/BATCH tasks be be grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such
-groups. At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group
-tasks for CPU bandwidth control purpose:
-
-        - Based on user id (CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED)
-                In this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id.
-        - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED)
-                This options lets the administrator create arbitrary groups
-                of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem. See
-                Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this
-                filesystem.
 
-Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both.
+1.  OVERVIEW
+
+CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process
+scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23.  It is the
+replacement for the previous vanilla scheduler's SCHED_OTHER interactivity
+code.
+
+80% of CFS's design can be summed up in a single sentence: CFS basically models
+an "ideal, precise multi-tasking CPU" on real hardware.
+
+"Ideal multi-tasking CPU" is a (non-existent  :-)) CPU that has 100% physical
+power and which can run each task at precise equal speed, in parallel, each at
+1/nr_running speed.  For example: if there are 2 tasks running, then it runs
+each at 50% physical power --- i.e., actually in parallel.
+
+On real hardware, we can run only a single task at once, so we have to
+introduce the concept of "virtual runtime."  The virtual runtime of a task
+specifies when its next timeslice would start execution on the ideal
+multi-tasking CPU described above.  In practice, the virtual runtime of a task
+is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks.
+
+
+
+2.  FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS
+
+In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task
+p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value.  This way, it's possible to accurately
+timestamp and measure the "expected CPU time" a task should have gotten.
+
+[ small detail: on "ideal" hardware, at any time all tasks would have the same
+  p->se.vruntime value --- i.e., tasks would execute simultaneously and no task
+  would ever get "out of balance" from the "ideal" share of CPU time.  ]
+
+CFS's task picking logic is based on this p->se.vruntime value and it is thus
+very simple: it always tries to run the task with the smallest p->se.vruntime
+value (i.e., the task which executed least so far).  CFS always tries to split
+up CPU time between runnable tasks as close to "ideal multitasking hardware" as
+possible.
+
+Most of the rest of CFS's design just falls out of this really simple concept,
+with a few add-on embellishments like nice levels, multiprocessing and various
+algorithm variants to recognize sleepers.
+
+
+
+3.  THE RBTREE
+
+CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the
+runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future
+task execution, and thus has no "array switch" artifacts (by which both the
+previous vanilla scheduler and RSDL/SD are affected).
+
+CFS also maintains the rq->cfs.min_vruntime value, which is a monotonic
+increasing value tracking the smallest vruntime among all tasks in the
+runqueue.  The total amount of work done by the system is tracked using
+min_vruntime; that value is used to place newly activated entities on the left
+side of the tree as much as possible.
+
+The total number of running tasks in the runqueue is accounted through the
+rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the
+runqueue.
+
+CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the
+p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to
+account for possible wraparounds).  CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this
+tree and sticks to it.
+As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree
+more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task
+to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic
+amount of time.
+
+Summing up, CFS works like this: it runs a task a bit, and when the task
+schedules (or a scheduler tick happens) the task's CPU usage is "accounted
+for": the (small) time it just spent using the physical CPU is added to
+p->se.vruntime.  Once p->se.vruntime gets high enough so that another task
+becomes the "leftmost task" of the time-ordered rbtree it maintains (plus a
+small amount of "granularity" distance relative to the leftmost task so that we
+do not over-schedule tasks and trash the cache), then the new leftmost task is
+picked and the current task is preempted.
+
+
+
+4.  SOME FEATURES OF CFS
+
+CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or
+other HZ detail.  Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the
+way the previous scheduler had, and has no heuristics whatsoever.  There is
+only one central tunable (you have to switch on CONFIG_SCHED_DEBUG):
+
+   /proc/sys/kernel/sched_granularity_ns
+
+which can be used to tune the scheduler from "desktop" (i.e., low latencies) to
+"server" (i.e., good batching) workloads.  It defaults to a setting suitable
+for desktop workloads.  SCHED_BATCH is handled by the CFS scheduler module too.
+
+Due to its design, the CFS scheduler is not prone to any of the "attacks" that
+exist today against the heuristics of the stock scheduler: fiftyp.c, thud.c,
+chew.c, ring-test.c, massive_intr.c all work fine and do not impact
+interactivity and produce the expected behavior.
+
+The CFS scheduler has a much stronger handling of nice levels and SCHED_BATCH
+than the previous vanilla scheduler: both types of workloads are isolated much
+more aggressively.
+
+SMP load-balancing has been reworked/sanitized: the runqueue-walking
+assumptions are gone from the load-balancing code now, and iterators of the
+scheduling modules are used.  The balancing code got quite a bit simpler as a
+result.
+
+
+
+5. Scheduling policies
+
+CFS implements three scheduling policies:
+
+  - SCHED_NORMAL (traditionally called SCHED_OTHER): The scheduling
+    policy that is used for regular tasks.
+
+  - SCHED_BATCH: Does not preempt nearly as often as regular tasks
+    would, thereby allowing tasks to run longer and make better use of
+    caches but at the cost of interactivity. This is well suited for
+    batch jobs.
+
+  - SCHED_IDLE: This is even weaker than nice 19, but its not a true
+    idle timer scheduler in order to avoid to get into priority
+    inversion problems which would deadlock the machine.
+
+SCHED_FIFO/_RR are implemented in sched_rt.c and are as specified by
+POSIX.
+
+The command chrt from util-linux-ng 2.13.1.1 can set all of these except
+SCHED_IDLE.
 
-Group scheduler tunables:
 
-When CONFIG_FAIR_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for
-each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory.
+
+6.  SCHEDULING CLASSES
+
+The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling
+Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules.  These modules
+encapsulate scheduling policy details and are handled by the scheduler core
+without the core code assuming too much about them.
+
+sched_fair.c implements the CFS scheduler described above.
+
+sched_rt.c implements SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR semantics, in a simpler way than
+the previous vanilla scheduler did.  It uses 100 runqueues (for all 100 RT
+priority levels, instead of 140 in the previous scheduler) and it needs no
+expired array.
+
+Scheduling classes are implemented through the sched_class structure, which
+contains hooks to functions that must be called whenever an interesting event
+occurs.
+
+This is the (partial) list of the hooks:
+
+ - enqueue_task(...)
+
+   Called when a task enters a runnable state.
+   It puts the scheduling entity (task) into the red-black tree and
+   increments the nr_running variable.
+
+ - dequeue_tree(...)
+
+   When a task is no longer runnable, this function is called to keep the
+   corresponding scheduling entity out of the red-black tree.  It decrements
+   the nr_running variable.
+
+ - yield_task(...)
+
+   This function is basically just a dequeue followed by an enqueue, unless the
+   compat_yield sysctl is turned on; in that case, it places the scheduling
+   entity at the right-most end of the red-black tree.
+
+ - check_preempt_curr(...)
+
+   This function checks if a task that entered the runnable state should
+   preempt the currently running task.
+
+ - pick_next_task(...)
+
+   This function chooses the most appropriate task eligible to run next.
+
+ - set_curr_task(...)
+
+   This function is called when a task changes its scheduling class or changes
+   its task group.
+
+ - task_tick(...)
+
+   This function is mostly called from time tick functions; it might lead to
+   process switch.  This drives the running preemption.
+
+ - task_new(...)
+
+   The core scheduler gives the scheduling module an opportunity to manage new
+   task startup.  The CFS scheduling module uses it for group scheduling, while
+   the scheduling module for a real-time task does not use it.
+
+
+
+7.  GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS
+
+Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide
+fair CPU time to each task.  Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and
+provide fair CPU time to each such task group.  For example, it may be
+desirable to first provide fair CPU time to each user on the system and then to
+each task belonging to a user.
+
+CONFIG_GROUP_SCHED strives to achieve exactly that.  It lets tasks to be
+grouped and divides CPU time fairly among such groups.
+
+CONFIG_RT_GROUP_SCHED permits to group real-time (i.e., SCHED_FIFO and
+SCHED_RR) tasks.
+
+CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED permits to group CFS (i.e., SCHED_NORMAL and
+SCHED_BATCH) tasks.
+
+At present, there are two (mutually exclusive) mechanisms to group tasks for
+CPU bandwidth control purposes:
+
+ - Based on user id (CONFIG_USER_SCHED)
+
+   With this option, tasks are grouped according to their user id.
+
+ - Based on "cgroup" pseudo filesystem (CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED)
+
+   This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator
+   create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem.  See
+   Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem.
+
+Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both.
+
+When CONFIG_USER_SCHED is defined, a directory is created in sysfs for each new
+user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory.
 
         # cd /sys/kernel/uids
         # cat 512/cpu_share             # Display user 512's CPU share
@@ -155,16 +246,14 @@ each new user and a "cpu_share" file is added in that directory.
         2048
         #
 
-CPU bandwidth between two users are divided in the ratio of their CPU shares.
-For ex: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user
-"guest", then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s
-cpu_share is twice "guest"'s cpu_share
-
+CPU bandwidth between two users is divided in the ratio of their CPU shares.
+For example: if you would like user "root" to get twice the bandwidth of user
+"guest," then set the cpu_share for both the users such that "root"'s cpu_share
+is twice "guest"'s cpu_share.
 
-When CONFIG_FAIR_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created
-for each group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps
-below to create task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups"
-pseudo filesystem
+When CONFIG_CGROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each
+group created using the pseudo filesystem.  See example steps below to create
+task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem.
 
         # mkdir /dev/cpuctl
         # mount -t cgroup -ocpu none /dev/cpuctl
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
index 716fcc1cafb5..c851ef497795 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
@@ -1,3 +1,26 @@
+
+1 Release Date    : Thur.July. 24 11:41:51 PST 2008 -
+                       (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+                       Sumant Patro
+                       Bo Yang
+
+2 Current Version : 00.00.04.01
+3 Older Version   : 00.00.03.22
+
+1. Add the new controller (0078, 0079) support to the driver
+       Those controllers are LSI's next generatation(gen2) SAS controllers.
+
+1 Release Date    : Mon.June. 23 10:12:45 PST 2008 -
+                       (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
+                       Sumant Patro
+                       Bo Yang
+
+2 Current Version : 00.00.03.22
+3 Older Version   : 00.00.03.20
+
+1. Add shutdown DCMD cmd to the shutdown routine to make FW shutdown proper.
+2. Unexpected interrupt occurs in HWR Linux driver, add the dumy readl pci flush will fix this issue.
+
 1 Release Date    : Mon. March 10 11:02:31 PDT 2008 -
                         (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
                         Sumant Patro
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
index 75143f0c23b6..38d324d62b25 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
@@ -436,6 +436,42 @@ Other:
     was updated to remove all vports for the fc_host as well.
 
 
+Transport supplied functions
+----------------------------
+
+The following functions are supplied by the FC-transport for use by LLDs.
+
+   fc_vport_create - create a vport
+   fc_vport_terminate - detach and remove a vport
+
+Details:
+
+/**
+ * fc_vport_create - Admin App or LLDD requests creation of a vport
+ * @shost:     scsi host the virtual port is connected to.
+ * @ids:       The world wide names, FC4 port roles, etc for
+ *              the virtual port.
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ *     This routine assumes no locks are held on entry.
+ */
+struct fc_vport *
+fc_vport_create(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct fc_vport_identifiers *ids)
+
+/**
+ * fc_vport_terminate - Admin App or LLDD requests termination of a vport
+ * @vport:      fc_vport to be terminated
+ *
+ * Calls the LLDD vport_delete() function, then deallocates and removes
+ * the vport from the shost and object tree.
+ *
+ * Notes:
+ *      This routine assumes no locks are held on entry.
+ */
+int
+fc_vport_terminate(struct fc_vport *vport)
+
+
 Credits
 =======
 The following people have contributed to this document:
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
index 6f6d117ac7e2..e0e54a27fc10 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
@@ -746,8 +746,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
   Module snd-hda-intel
   --------------------
 
-    Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8),
-                ATI SB450, SB600, RS600,
+    Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8, ICH9, ICH10,
+                        PCH, SCH),
+                ATI SB450, SB600, R600, RS600, RS690, RS780, RV610, RV620,
+                        RV630, RV635, RV670, RV770,
                 VIA VT8251/VT8237A,
                 SIS966, ULI M5461
 
@@ -807,6 +809,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
         ALC260
           hp            HP machines
           hp-3013       HP machines (3013-variant)
+          hp-dc7600     HP DC7600
           fujitsu       Fujitsu S7020
           acer          Acer TravelMate
           will          Will laptops (PB V7900)
@@ -828,8 +831,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           hippo         Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s
           hippo_1       Hippo (Benq) with jack detection
           sony-assamd   Sony ASSAMD
+          toshiba-s06   Toshiba S06
+          toshiba-rx1   Toshiba RX1
           ultra         Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model
           lenovo-3000   Lenovo 3000 y410
+          nec           NEC Versa S9100
           basic         fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF
           auto          auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
@@ -838,6 +844,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           3stack        3-stack model
           toshiba       Toshiba A205
           acer          Acer laptops
+          acer-aspire   Acer Aspire One
           dell          Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200)
           zepto         Zepto laptops
           test          for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can
@@ -847,6 +854,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
         ALC269
           basic         Basic preset
+          quanta        Quanta FL1
+          eeepc-p703    ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A
+          eeepc-p901    ASUS Eeepc P901 S101
 
         ALC662/663
           3stack-dig    3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF
@@ -856,10 +866,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           lenovo-101e    Lenovo laptop
           eeepc-p701    ASUS Eeepc P701
           eeepc-ep20    ASUS Eeepc EP20
+          ecs           ECS/Foxconn mobo
           m51va         ASUS M51VA
           g71v          ASUS G71V
           h13           ASUS H13
           g50v          ASUS G50V
+          asus-mode1    ASUS
+          asus-mode2    ASUS
+          asus-mode3    ASUS
+          asus-mode4    ASUS
+          asus-mode5    ASUS
+          asus-mode6    ASUS
           auto          auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
         ALC882/885
@@ -891,12 +908,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           lenovo-101e   Lenovo 101E
           lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763
           lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195
+          lenovo-sky    Lenovo Sky
           haier-w66     Haier W66
           3stack-hp     HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards)
           6stack-dell   Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530)
           mitac         Mitac 8252D
           clevo-m720    Clevo M720 laptop series
           fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515
+          3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards
           auto          auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
         ALC861/660
@@ -929,7 +948,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
           allout        5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out
           auto          auto-config reading BIOS (default)
 
-        AD1882
+        AD1882 / AD1882A
           3stack        3-stack mode (default)
           6stack        6-stack mode
 
@@ -1079,7 +1098,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
             register value without FIFO size correction as the current
             DMA pointer.  position_fix=2 will make the driver to use
             the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register.
-            (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the
+            (Usually SD_LPIB register is more accurate than the
             position buffer.)
 
     NB: If you get many "azx_get_response timeout" messages at
@@ -1144,8 +1163,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-ice1712
   ------------------
 
@@ -1168,6 +1185,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
                         * Event Electronics, EZ8
                         * Digigram VX442
                         * Lionstracs, Mediastaton
+                        * Terrasoniq TS 88
 
     model       - Use the given board model, one of the following:
                   delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410,
@@ -1202,7 +1220,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
                         * TerraTec Phase 22
                         * TerraTec Phase 28
                         * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1
-                        * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1LT
+                        * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 LT
+                        * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 XT
+                        * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HIFI
+                        * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 HD2
                         * AudioTrak Prodigy 192
                         * Pontis MS300
                         * Albatron K8X800 Pro II 
@@ -1213,12 +1234,16 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
                         * Shuttle SN25P
                         * Onkyo SE-90PCI
                         * Onkyo SE-200PCI
+                        * ESI Juli@
+                        * Hercules Fortissimo IV
+                        * EGO-SYS WaveTerminal 192M
 
     model       - Use the given board model, one of the following:
                   revo51, revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy71lt,
-                  prodigy192, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192,
-                  k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci,
-                  se90pci
+                  prodigy71xt, prodigy71hifi, prodigyhd2, prodigy192,
+                  juli, aureon51, aureon71, universe, ap192, k8x800,
+                  phase22, phase28, ms300, av710, se200pci, se90pci,
+                  fortissimo4, sn25p, WT192M
 
     This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
 
@@ -1257,7 +1282,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     Module for AC'97 motherboards from Intel and compatibles.
                         * Intel i810/810E, i815, i820, i830, i84x, MX440
-                                ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, ESB2
+                                ICH5, ICH6, ICH7, 6300ESB, ESB2
                         * SiS 7012 (SiS 735)
                         * NVidia NForce, NForce2, NForce3, MCP04, CK804
                                  CK8, CK8S, MCP501
@@ -1628,8 +1653,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-pcsp
   -----------------
 
@@ -1955,6 +1978,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
                         * CHIC  True Sound 4Dwave
                         * Shark  Predator4D-PCI
                         * Jaton  SonicWave 4D
+                        * SiS SI7018 PCI Audio
+                        * Hoontech SoundTrack Digital 4DWave NX
 
     pcm_channels   - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM
     wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb)
@@ -1970,12 +1995,25 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
 
     vid             - Vendor ID for the device (optional)
     pid             - Product ID for the device (optional)
+    nrpacks         - Max. number of packets per URB (default: 8)
+    async_unlink    - Use async unlink mode (default: yes)
     device_setup    - Device specific magic number (optional)
                     - Influence depends on the device
                     - Default: 0x0000 
+    ignore_ctl_error - Ignore any USB-controller regarding mixer
+                       interface (default: no)
 
     This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging.
 
+    NB: nrpacks parameter can be modified dynamically via sysfs.
+        Don't put the value over 20.  Changing via sysfs has no sanity
+        check.
+    NB: async_unlink=0 would cause Oops.  It remains just for
+        debugging purpose (if any).
+    NB: ignore_ctl_error=1 may help when you get an error at accessing
+        the mixer element such as URB error -22.  This happens on some
+        buggy USB device or the controller.
+
   Module snd-usb-caiaq
   --------------------
 
@@ -2081,13 +2119,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
   Module snd-virtuoso
   -------------------
 
-    Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV200 chip, i.e.,
-    Xonar D2 and Xonar D2X.
+    Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips,
+    i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X and HDAV1.3 (Deluxe).
 
     This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
 
-    Power management is _not_ supported.
-
   Module snd-vx222
   ----------------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
index e13c4e67029f..87a7c07ab658 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
@@ -5073,8 +5073,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       with <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_CONTINUOUS</constant> type and the
       <function>snd_dma_continuous_data(GFP_KERNEL)</function> device pointer,
       where <constant>GFP_KERNEL</constant> is the kernel allocation flag to
-      use.  For the SBUS, <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_SBUS</constant> and
-      <function>snd_dma_sbus_data(sbus_dev)</function> are used instead.
+      use.
       For the PCI scatter-gather buffers, use
       <constant>SNDRV_DMA_TYPE_DEV_SG</constant> with
       <function>snd_dma_pci_data(pci)</function>
@@ -6135,44 +6134,58 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
       </para>
     </section>
 
-    <section id="useful-functions-snd-assert">
-      <title><function>snd_assert()</function></title>
+    <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug">
+      <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title>
       <para>
-        <function>snd_assert()</function> macro is similar with the
-      normal <function>assert()</function> macro. For example,  
+        It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and
+      stack trace as well as <function>snd_BUG_ON</function> at the point.
+      It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. 
+      </para>
+      <para>
+         When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. 
+      </para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug-on">
+      <title><function>snd_BUG_ON()</function></title>
+      <para>
+        <function>snd_BUG_ON()</function> macro is similar with
+        <function>WARN_ON()</function> macro. For example,  
 
         <informalexample>
           <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  snd_assert(pointer != NULL, return -EINVAL);
+  snd_BUG_ON(!pointer);
 ]]>
           </programlisting>
         </informalexample>
-      </para>
 
-      <para>
-        The first argument is the expression to evaluate, and the
-      second argument is the action if it fails. When
-      <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, it will show an
-      error message such as <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput>
-      together with stack trace.
-      </para>
-      <para>
-         When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. 
-      </para>
-    </section>
+        or it can be used as the condition,
+        <informalexample>
+          <programlisting>
+<![CDATA[
+  if (snd_BUG_ON(non_zero_is_bug))
+          return -EINVAL;
+]]>
+          </programlisting>
+        </informalexample>
 
-    <section id="useful-functions-snd-bug">
-      <title><function>snd_BUG()</function></title>
-      <para>
-        It shows the <computeroutput>BUG?</computeroutput> message and
-      stack trace as well as <function>snd_assert</function> at the point.
-      It's useful to show that a fatal error happens there. 
       </para>
+
       <para>
-         When no debug flag is set, this macro is ignored. 
+        The macro takes an conditional expression to evaluate.
+        When <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant>, is set, the
+        expression is actually evaluated. If it's non-zero, it shows
+        the warning message such as
+        <computeroutput>BUG? (xxx)</computeroutput>
+        normally followed by stack trace.  It returns the evaluated
+        value.
+        When no <constant>CONFIG_SND_DEBUG</constant> is set, this
+        macro always returns zero.
       </para>
+
     </section>
+
   </chapter>
 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
index b2ed6983f40d..46f9684d0b29 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
@@ -135,11 +135,7 @@ when the Mic is inserted:-
 
 static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event)
 {
-        if(SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event))
-                set_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS);
-        else
-                reset_scoop_gpio(&spitzscoop2_device.dev, SPITZ_SCP2_MIC_BIAS);
-
+        gpio_set_value(SPITZ_GPIO_MIC_BIAS, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event));
         return 0;
 }
 
@@ -269,11 +265,7 @@ powered only when the spk is in use.
 /* turn speaker amplifier on/off depending on use */
 static int corgi_amp_event(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget *w, int event)
 {
-        if (SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event))
-                set_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON);
-        else
-                reset_scoop_gpio(&corgiscoop_device.dev, CORGI_SCP_APM_ON);
-
+        gpio_set_value(CORGI_GPIO_APM_ON, SND_SOC_DAPM_EVENT_ON(event));
         return 0;
 }
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index eb1e28ad8822..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,309 +0,0 @@
-
-                Writing SBUS Drivers
-
-            David S. Miller (davem@redhat.com)
-
-        The SBUS driver interfaces of the Linux kernel have been
-revamped completely for 2.4.x for several reasons.  Foremost were
-performance and complexity concerns.  This document details these
-new interfaces and how they are used to write an SBUS device driver.
-
-        SBUS drivers need to include <asm/sbus.h> to get access
-to functions and structures described here.
-
-                Probing and Detection
-
-        Each SBUS device inside the machine is described by a
-structure called "struct sbus_dev".  Likewise, each SBUS bus
-found in the system is described by a "struct sbus_bus".  For
-each SBUS bus, the devices underneath are hung in a tree-like
-fashion off of the bus structure.
-
-        The SBUS device structure contains enough information
-for you to implement your device probing algorithm and obtain
-the bits necessary to run your device.  The most commonly
-used members of this structure, and their typical usage,
-will be detailed below.
-
-        Here is a piece of skeleton code for performing a device
-probe in an SBUS driver under Linux:
-
-        static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
-        {
-                struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL);
-
-                if (!mp)
-                        return -ENODEV;
-
-                ...
-                dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp);
-                return 0;
-                ...
-        }
-
-        static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev,
-                                            const struct of_device_id *match)
-        {
-                struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
-
-                return mydevice_probe_one(sdev);
-        }
-
-        static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev)
-        {
-                struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
-                struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev);
-
-                return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp);
-        }
-
-        static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = {
-                {
-                        .name = "mydevice",
-                },
-                {},
-        };
-
-        MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match);
-
-        static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = {
-                .match_table    = mydevice_match,
-                .probe          = mydevice_probe,
-                .remove         = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove),
-                .driver         = {
-                        .name           = "mydevice",
-                },
-        };
-
-        static int __init mydevice_init(void)
-        {
-                return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type);
-        }
-
-        static void __exit mydevice_exit(void)
-        {
-                of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver);
-        }
-
-        module_init(mydevice_init);
-        module_exit(mydevice_exit);
-
-        The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which
-describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for.  In the
-simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field.  Every
-SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will
-be passed one-by-one to your .probe method.
-
-        You should store away your device private state structure
-pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on
-in your .remove method.
-
-        Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered,
-etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources
-of your device are released by the time it returns.
-
-        You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(),
-and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces.  They are deprecated, will be
-removed, and no new driver should reference them ever.
-
-                Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers
-
-        Each SBUS device structure contains an array of descriptors
-which describe each register set. We abuse struct resource for that.
-They each correspond to the "reg" properties provided by the OBP firmware.
-
-        Before you can access your device's registers you must map
-them.  And later if you wish to shutdown your driver (for module
-unload or similar) you must unmap them.  You must treat them as
-a resource, which you allocate (map) before using and free up
-(unmap) when you are done with it.
-
-        The mapping information is stored in an opaque value
-typed as an "unsigned long".  This is the type of the return value
-of the mapping interface, and the arguments to the unmapping
-interface.  Let's say you want to map the first set of registers.
-Perhaps part of your driver software state structure looks like:
-
-        struct mydevice {
-                unsigned long control_regs;
-           ...
-                struct sbus_dev *sdev;
-           ...
-        };
-
-        At initialization time you then use the sbus_ioremap
-interface to map in your registers, like so:
-
-        static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
-        {
-                struct mydevice *mp;
-                ...
-
-                mp->control_regs = sbus_ioremap(&sdev->resource[0], 0,
-                                        CONTROL_REGS_SIZE, "mydevice regs");
-                if (!mp->control_regs) {
-                        /* Failure, cleanup and return. */
-                }
-        }
-
-        Second argument to sbus_ioremap is an offset for
-cranky devices with broken OBP PROM. The sbus_ioremap uses only
-a start address and flags from the resource structure.
-Therefore it is possible to use the same resource to map
-several sets of registers or even to fabricate a resource
-structure if driver gets physical address from some private place.
-This practice is discouraged though. Use whatever OBP PROM
-provided to you.
-
-        And here is how you might unmap these registers later at
-driver shutdown or module unload time, using the sbus_iounmap
-interface:
-
-        static void mydevice_unmap_regs(struct mydevice *mp)
-        {
-                sbus_iounmap(mp->control_regs, CONTROL_REGS_SIZE);
-        }
-
-        Finally, to actually access your registers there are 6
-interface routines at your disposal.  Accesses are byte (8 bit),
-word (16 bit), or longword (32 bit) sized.  Here they are:
-
-        u8 sbus_readb(unsigned long reg)                /* read byte */
-        u16 sbus_readw(unsigned long reg)               /* read word */
-        u32 sbus_readl(unsigned long reg)               /* read longword */
-        void sbus_writeb(u8 value, unsigned long reg)   /* write byte */
-        void sbus_writew(u16 value, unsigned long reg)  /* write word */
-        void sbus_writel(u32 value, unsigned long reg)  /* write longword */
-
-        So, let's say your device has a control register of some sort
-at offset zero.  The following might implement resetting your device:
-
-        #define CONTROL         0x00UL
-
-        #define CONTROL_RESET   0x00000001      /* Reset hardware */
-
-        static void mydevice_reset(struct mydevice *mp)
-        {
-                sbus_writel(CONTROL_RESET, mp->regs + CONTROL);
-        }
-
-        Or perhaps there is a data port register at an offset of
-16 bytes which allows you to read bytes from a fifo in the device:
-
-        #define DATA            0x10UL
-
-        static u8 mydevice_get_byte(struct mydevice *mp)
-        {
-                return sbus_readb(mp->regs + DATA);
-        }
-
-        It's pretty straightforward, and clueful readers may have
-noticed that these interfaces mimick the PCI interfaces of the
-Linux kernel.  This was not by accident.
-
-        WARNING:
-
-                DO NOT try to treat these opaque register mapping
-                values as a memory mapped pointer to some structure
-                which you can dereference.
-
-                It may be memory mapped, it may not be.  In fact it
-                could be a physical address, or it could be the time
-                of day xor'd with 0xdeadbeef.  :-)
-
-                Whatever it is, it's an implementation detail.  The
-                interface was done this way to shield the driver
-                author from such complexities.
-
-                        Doing DVMA
-
-        SBUS devices can perform DMA transactions in a way similar
-to PCI but dissimilar to ISA, e.g. DMA masters supply address.
-In contrast to PCI, however, that address (a bus address) is
-translated by IOMMU before a memory access is performed and therefore
-it is virtual. Sun calls this procedure DVMA.
-
-        Linux supports two styles of using SBUS DVMA: "consistent memory"
-and "streaming DVMA". CPU view of consistent memory chunk is, well,
-consistent with a view of a device. Think of it as an uncached memory.
-Typically this way of doing DVMA is not very fast and drivers use it
-mostly for control blocks or queues. On some CPUs we cannot flush or
-invalidate individual pages or cache lines and doing explicit flushing
-over ever little byte in every control block would be wasteful.
-
-Streaming DVMA is a preferred way to transfer large amounts of data.
-This process works in the following way:
-1. a CPU stops accessing a certain part of memory,
-   flushes its caches covering that memory;
-2. a device does DVMA accesses, then posts an interrupt;
-3. CPU invalidates its caches and starts to access the memory.
-
-A single streaming DVMA operation can touch several discontiguous
-regions of a virtual bus address space. This is called a scatter-gather
-DVMA.
-
-[TBD: Why do not we neither Solaris attempt to map disjoint pages
-into a single virtual chunk with the help of IOMMU, so that non SG
-DVMA masters would do SG? It'd be very helpful for RAID.]
-
-        In order to perform a consistent DVMA a driver does something
-like the following:
-
-        char *mem;              /* Address in the CPU space */
-        u32 busa;               /* Address in the SBus space */
-
-        mem = (char *) sbus_alloc_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, &busa);
-
-        Then mem is used when CPU accesses this memory and u32
-is fed to the device so that it can do DVMA. This is typically
-done with an sbus_writel() into some device register.
-
-        Do not forget to free the DVMA resources once you are done:
-
-        sbus_free_consistent(sdev, MYMEMSIZE, mem, busa);
-
-        Streaming DVMA is more interesting. First you allocate some
-memory suitable for it or pin down some user pages. Then it all works
-like this:
-
-        char *mem = argumen1;
-        unsigned int size = argument2;
-        u32 busa;               /* Address in the SBus space */
-
-        *mem = 1;               /* CPU can access */
-        busa = sbus_map_single(sdev, mem, size);
-        if (busa == 0) .......
-
-        /* Tell the device to use busa here */
-        /* CPU cannot access the memory without sbus_dma_sync_single() */
-
-        sbus_unmap_single(sdev, busa, size);
-        if (*mem == 0) ....     /* CPU can access again */
-
-        It is possible to retain mappings and ask the device to
-access data again and again without calling sbus_unmap_single.
-However, CPU caches must be invalidated with sbus_dma_sync_single
-before such access.
-
-[TBD but what about writeback caches here... do we have any?]
-
-        There is an equivalent set of functions doing the same thing
-only with several memory segments at once for devices capable of
-scatter-gather transfers. Use the Source, Luke.
-
-                        Examples
-
-        drivers/net/sunhme.c
-        This is a complicated driver which illustrates many concepts
-discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards.
-
-        drivers/scsi/esp.c
-        Check it out for scatter-gather DVMA.
-
-        drivers/sbus/char/bpp.c
-        A non-DVMA device.
-
-        drivers/net/sunlance.c
-        Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer.
-It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend...
-Just check it out and know that it's legal.
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/Makefile b/Documentation/spi/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5b03c88beae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/spi/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := spidev_test spidev_fdx
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
+
+HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_test.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
+HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_fdx.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
index f3853cc37bde..bbe8dee681a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
+++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers
 -----------------------------------
 Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a
 "platform device".  The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table
-found in include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h:
+found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h:
 
 struct pxa2xx_spi_master {
         enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type;
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See
 
 Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration
 information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in
-"include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
+"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h".  The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver
 will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave
 device.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
index 6d5f18143c50..8bae2f018d34 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ board should normally be set up and registered.
 
 So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
 
-        #include <asm/arch/spi.h>       /* for mysoc_spi_data */
+        #include <mach/spi.h>   /* for mysoc_spi_data */
 
         /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can
          * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init".
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
 
 And SOC-specific utility code might look something like:
 
-        #include <asm/arch/spi.h>
+        #include <mach/spi.h>
 
         static struct platform_device spi2 = { ... };
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
index 276a7e637822..e1ff0d920a5c 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
@@ -351,9 +351,10 @@ kernel.  This value defaults to SHMMAX.
 
 softlockup_thresh:
 
-This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance
-threshold. The default threshold is 10s.  If a cpu is locked up
-for 10s, the kernel complains.  Valid values are 1-60s.
+This value can be used to lower the softlockup tolerance threshold.  The
+default threshold is 60 seconds.  If a cpu is locked up for 60 seconds,
+the kernel complains.  Valid values are 1-60 seconds.  Setting this
+tunable to zero will disable the softlockup detection altogether.
 
 ==============================================================
 
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..397dc35e1323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+00-INDEX
+        - this file
+highres.txt
+        - High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes
+hpet.txt
+        - High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
+hrtimers.txt
+        - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers
+timer_stats.txt
+        - timer usage statistics
diff --git a/Documentation/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
index 6ad52d9dad6c..e7c09abcfab4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hpet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
@@ -1,21 +1,32 @@
                 High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
 
-The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement
-for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality.
-Each HPET can have up to 32 timers.  It is possible to configure the
-first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers.
-A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at
-<http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm>.
+The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware follows a specification
+by Intel and Microsoft which can be found at
+
+        http://www.intel.com/technology/architecture/hpetspec.htm
+
+Each HPET has one fixed-rate counter (at 10+ MHz, hence "High Precision")
+and up to 32 comparators.  Normally three or more comparators are provided,
+each of which can generate oneshot interupts and at least one of which has
+additional hardware to support periodic interrupts.  The comparators are
+also called "timers", which can be misleading since usually timers are
+independent of each other ... these share a counter, complicating resets.
+
+HPET devices can support two interrupt routing modes.  In one mode, the
+comparators are additional interrupt sources with no particular system
+role.  Many x86 BIOS writers don't route HPET interrupts at all, which
+prevents use of that mode.  They support the other "legacy replacement"
+mode where the first two comparators block interrupts from 8254 timers
+and from the RTC.
 
 The driver supports detection of HPET driver allocation and initialization
 of the HPET before the driver module_init routine is called.  This enables
 platform code which uses timer 0 or 1 as the main timer to intercept HPET
 initialization.  An example of this initialization can be found in
-arch/i386/kernel/time_hpet.c.
+arch/x86/kernel/hpet.c.
 
-The driver provides two APIs which are very similar to the API found in
-the rtc.c driver.  There is a user space API and a kernel space API.
-An example user space program is provided below.
+The driver provides a userspace API which resembles the API found in the
+RTC driver framework.  An example user space program is provided below.
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
@@ -286,15 +297,3 @@ out:
 
         return;
 }
-
-The kernel API has three interfaces exported from the driver:
-
-        hpet_register(struct hpet_task *tp, int periodic)
-        hpet_unregister(struct hpet_task *tp)
-        hpet_control(struct hpet_task *tp, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg)
-
-The kernel module using this interface fills in the ht_func and ht_data
-members of the hpet_task structure before calling hpet_register.
-hpet_control simply vectors to the hpet_ioctl routine and has the same
-commands and respective arguments as the user API.  hpet_unregister
-is used to terminate usage of the HPET timer reserved by hpet_register.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt
index 7304bcf5a306..5e6b64c20d25 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/anchors.txt
@@ -42,9 +42,21 @@ This function kills all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs
 are called in the reverse temporal order they were submitted.
 This way no data can be reordered.
 
+usb_unlink_anchored_urbs()
+--------------------------
+
+This function unlinks all URBs associated with an anchor. The URBs
+are processed in the reverse temporal order they were submitted.
+This is similar to usb_kill_anchored_urbs(), but it will not sleep.
+Therefore no guarantee is made that the URBs have been unlinked when
+the call returns. They may be unlinked later but will be unlinked in
+finite time.
+
 usb_wait_anchor_empty_timeout()
 -------------------------------
 
 This function waits for all URBs associated with an anchor to finish
 or a timeout, whichever comes first. Its return value will tell you
 whether the timeout was reached.
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt b/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ee4d8f69116..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-                Auerswald USB kernel driver
-                ===========================
-
-What is it? What can I do with it?
-==================================
-The auerswald USB kernel driver connects your linux 2.4.x
-system to the auerswald usb-enabled devices.
-
-There are two types of auerswald usb devices:
-a) small PBX systems (ISDN)
-b) COMfort system telephones (ISDN)
-
-The driver installation creates the devices
-/dev/usb/auer0..15. These devices carry a vendor-
-specific protocol. You may run all auerswald java
-software on it. The java software needs a native
-library "libAuerUsbJNINative.so" installed on
-your system. This library is available from
-auerswald and shipped as part of the java software.
-
-You may create the devices with:
-        mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer0 c 180 112
-        ...
-        mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer15 c 180 127
-
-Future plans
-============
-- Connection to ISDN4LINUX (the hisax interface)
-
-The maintainer of this driver is wolfgang@iksw-muees.de
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index b2fc4d4a9917..9d31140e3f5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -436,7 +436,12 @@ post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal
 suspend/resume events as well.
 
 If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some
-critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex.
+critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. Note that
+calls to resume may be triggered indirectly. Block IO due to memory
+allocations can make the vm subsystem resume a device. Thus while
+holding this lock you must not allocate memory with GFP_KERNEL or
+GFP_NOFS.
+
 Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the
 usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing:
 
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
index eedc399e8deb..aa05e5bb22fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828
@@ -3,3 +3,4 @@
   2 -> Hauppauge HVR850                         (au0828)        [2040:7240]
   3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB                     (au0828)        [0fe9:d620]
   4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8               (au0828)        [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281]
+  5 -> Hauppauge Woodbury                       (au0828)        [2040:8200]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
index f32efb6fb12c..60ba66836038 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
@@ -150,3 +150,4 @@
 149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684)
 150 -> Geovision GV-600                                    [008a:763c]
 151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C
+152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2                                  [1000:1801]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
index f0e613ba55b8..64823ccacd69 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
@@ -9,3 +9,5 @@
   8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700                             [0070:8101]
   9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400                             [0070:8010]
  10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express                      [18ac:d618]
+ 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express                 [18ac:db78]
+ 12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H                         [107d:6681]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
index 7cf5685d3645..a5227e308f4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
@@ -66,3 +66,11 @@
  65 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 7 Gold                             [18ac:d610]
  66 -> Prolink Pixelview MPEG 8000GT                       [1554:4935]
  67 -> Kworld PlusTV HD PCI 120 (ATSC 120)                 [17de:08c1]
+ 68 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000 DVB-S/S2/T/Hybrid           [0070:6900,0070:6904,0070:6902]
+ 69 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR4000(Lite) DVB-S/S2              [0070:6905,0070:6906]
+ 70 -> TeVii S460 DVB-S/S2                                 [d460:9022]
+ 71 -> Omicom SS4 DVB-S/S2 PCI                             [A044:2011]
+ 72 -> TBS 8920 DVB-S/S2                                   [8920:8888]
+ 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S                                    [d420:9022]
+ 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme                    [1554:4976]
+ 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2                                  [B033:3033]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
index 89c7f32abf9f..187cc48d0924 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
   0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber             (em2800)        [eb1a:2800]
-  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
+  1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber        (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883]
   2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB                 (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036]
   3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2                      (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208]
   4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2                    (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201]
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
  11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS                       (em2880)        [0ccd:0042]
  12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF                    (em2820/em2840)
  13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS                      (em2880)        [0ccd:0047]
- 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0         (em2820/em2840)
+ 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0         (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821]
  15 -> V-Gear PocketTV                          (em2800)
  16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950                  (em2883)        [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
  17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick               (em2880)        [2304:0227]
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
  45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T                      (em2870)
  46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3                     (em2870)        [185b:2870]
  47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U                        (em2880)        [eb1a:e305]
- 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U                        (em2880)
+ 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U                        (em2880)        [eb1a:e310]
  49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D                          (em2880)        [eb1a:e310]
  50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II                       (em2880)        [eb1a:e320]
  51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam                 (em2880)        [0ccd:004c]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index 39868af9cf9f..dc67eef38ff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
  75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180              [1461:1044]
  76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile                   [1131:4ee9]
  77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133)     [11bd:002e]
- 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual                       [1043:4862,1043:4857]
+ 78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual                       [1043:4862]
  79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B)
  80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV                       [1043:0210]
  81 -> Philips Tiger reference design           [1131:2018]
@@ -145,3 +145,9 @@
 144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra               [5ace:6193]
 145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103      [1461:f636]
 146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog
+147 -> Asus Tiger 3in1                          [1043:4878]
+148 -> Encore ENLTV-FM v5.3                     [1a7f:2008]
+149 -> Avermedia PCI pure analog (M135A)        [1461:f11d]
+150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220
+151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV                    [1421:0380]
+152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00                      [1043:4857]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
index 0e2394695bb8..30bbdda68d03 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
@@ -74,3 +74,4 @@ tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600
 tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A
 tuner=75 - Philips TEA5761 FM Radio
 tuner=76 - Xceive 5000 tuner
+tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1ed0e98d057d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := v4lgrab
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
index bcaf4ab383be..004818fab040 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ The modules are:
 xxxx            vend:prod
 ----
 spca501         0000:0000       MystFromOri Unknow Camera
+m5602           0402:5602       ALi Video Camera Controller
 spca501         040a:0002       Kodak DVC-325
 spca500         040a:0300       Kodak EZ200
 zc3xx           041e:041e       Creative WebCam Live!
@@ -42,6 +43,7 @@ zc3xx		0458:7007	Genius VideoCam V2
 zc3xx           0458:700c       Genius VideoCam V3
 zc3xx           0458:700f       Genius VideoCam Web V2
 sonixj          0458:7025       Genius Eye 311Q
+sonixj          0458:702e       Genius Slim 310 NB
 sonixj          045e:00f5       MicroSoft VX3000
 sonixj          045e:00f7       MicroSoft VX1000
 ov519           045e:028c       Micro$oft xbox cam
@@ -81,21 +83,44 @@ spca561		046d:092b	Labtec Webcam Plus
 spca561         046d:092c       Logitech QC chat Elch2
 spca561         046d:092d       Logitech QC Elch2
 spca561         046d:092e       Logitech QC Elch2
-spca561         046d:092f       Logitech QC Elch2
+spca561         046d:092f       Logitech  QuickCam Express Plus
 sunplus         046d:0960       Logitech ClickSmart 420
 sunplus         0471:0322       Philips DMVC1300K
 zc3xx           0471:0325       Philips SPC 200 NC
 zc3xx           0471:0326       Philips SPC 300 NC
 sonixj          0471:0327       Philips SPC 600 NC
 sonixj          0471:0328       Philips SPC 700 NC
-zc3xx           0471:032d       Philips spc210nc
-zc3xx           0471:032e       Philips spc315nc
-sonixj          0471:0330       Philips SPC 710NC
+zc3xx           0471:032d       Philips SPC 210 NC
+zc3xx           0471:032e       Philips SPC 315 NC
+sonixj          0471:0330       Philips SPC 710 NC
 spca501         0497:c001       Smile International
 sunplus         04a5:3003       Benq DC 1300
 sunplus         04a5:3008       Benq DC 1500
-sunplus         04a5:300a       Benq DC3410
-spca500         04a5:300c       Benq DC1016
+sunplus         04a5:300a       Benq DC 3410
+spca500         04a5:300c       Benq DC 1016
+finepix         04cb:0104       Fujifilm FinePix 4800
+finepix         04cb:0109       Fujifilm FinePix A202
+finepix         04cb:010b       Fujifilm FinePix A203
+finepix         04cb:010f       Fujifilm FinePix A204
+finepix         04cb:0111       Fujifilm FinePix A205
+finepix         04cb:0113       Fujifilm FinePix A210
+finepix         04cb:0115       Fujifilm FinePix A303
+finepix         04cb:0117       Fujifilm FinePix A310
+finepix         04cb:0119       Fujifilm FinePix F401
+finepix         04cb:011b       Fujifilm FinePix F402
+finepix         04cb:011d       Fujifilm FinePix F410
+finepix         04cb:0121       Fujifilm FinePix F601
+finepix         04cb:0123       Fujifilm FinePix F700
+finepix         04cb:0125       Fujifilm FinePix M603
+finepix         04cb:0127       Fujifilm FinePix S300
+finepix         04cb:0129       Fujifilm FinePix S304
+finepix         04cb:012b       Fujifilm FinePix S500
+finepix         04cb:012d       Fujifilm FinePix S602
+finepix         04cb:012f       Fujifilm FinePix S700
+finepix         04cb:0131       Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
+finepix         04cb:013b       Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
+finepix         04cb:013d       Fujifilm FinePix unknown model
+finepix         04cb:013f       Fujifilm FinePix F420
 sunplus         04f1:1001       JVC GC A50
 spca561         04fc:0561       Flexcam 100
 sunplus         04fc:500c       Sunplus CA500C
@@ -175,19 +200,23 @@ sunplus		08ca:2060	Aiptek PocketDV5300
 tv8532          0923:010f       ICM532 cams
 mars            093a:050f       Mars-Semi Pc-Camera
 pac207          093a:2460       PAC207 Qtec Webcam 100
-pac207          093a:2463       Philips spc200nc pac207
+pac207          093a:2463       Philips SPC 220 NC
 pac207          093a:2464       Labtec Webcam 1200
 pac207          093a:2468       PAC207
 pac207          093a:2470       Genius GF112
-pac207          093a:2471       PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge111
-pac207          093a:2472       PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge110
+pac207          093a:2471       Genius VideoCam ge111
+pac207          093a:2472       Genius VideoCam ge110
+pac207          093a:2476       Genius e-Messenger 112
 pac7311         093a:2600       PAC7311 Typhoon
-pac7311         093a:2601       PAC7311 Phillips SPC610NC
+pac7311         093a:2601       Philips SPC 610 NC
 pac7311         093a:2603       PAC7312
-pac7311         093a:2608       PAC7311 Trust WB-3300p
-pac7311         093a:260e       PAC7311 Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350
-pac7311         093a:260f       PAC7311 SnakeCam
+pac7311         093a:2608       Trust WB-3300p
+pac7311         093a:260e       Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350
+pac7311         093a:260f       SnakeCam
 pac7311         093a:2621       PAC731x
+pac7311         093a:2624       PAC7302
+pac7311         093a:2626       Labtec 2200
+pac7311         093a:262a       Webcam 300k
 zc3xx           0ac8:0302       Z-star Vimicro zc0302
 vc032x          0ac8:0321       Vimicro generic vc0321
 vc032x          0ac8:0323       Vimicro Vc0323
@@ -220,12 +249,14 @@ sonixj		0c45:60c0	Sangha Sn535
 sonixj          0c45:60ec       SN9C105+MO4000
 sonixj          0c45:60fb       Surfer NoName
 sonixj          0c45:60fc       LG-LIC300
+sonixj          0c45:6128       Microdia/Sonix SNP325
 sonixj          0c45:612a       Avant Camera
 sonixj          0c45:612c       Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix
 sonixj          0c45:6130       Sonix Pccam
 sonixj          0c45:6138       Sn9c120 Mo4000
 sonixj          0c45:613b       Surfer SN-206
 sonixj          0c45:613c       Sonix Pccam168
+sonixj          0c45:6143       Sonix Pccam168
 sunplus         0d64:0303       Sunplus FashionCam DXG
 etoms           102c:6151       Qcam Sangha CIF
 etoms           102c:6251       Qcam xxxxxx VGA
@@ -233,7 +264,7 @@ zc3xx		10fd:0128	Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128
 spca561         10fd:7e50       FlyCam Usb 100
 zc3xx           10fd:8050       Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k
 spca501         1776:501c       Arowana 300K CMOS Camera
-t613            17a1:0128       T613/TAS5130A
+t613            17a1:0128       TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops
 vc032x          17ef:4802       Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC
 pac207          2001:f115       D-Link DSB-C120
 spca500         2899:012c       Toptro Industrial
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4450ab13f37b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/m5602.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+This document describes the ALi m5602 bridge connected
+to the following supported sensors:
+OmniVision OV9650,
+Samsung s5k83a,
+Samsung s5k4aa,
+Micron mt9m111,
+Pixel plus PO1030
+
+This driver mimics the windows drivers, which have a braindead implementation sending bayer-encoded frames at VGA resolution.
+In a perfect world we should be able to reprogram the m5602 and the connected sensor in hardware instead, supporting a range of resolutions and pixelformats
+
+Anyway, have fun and please report any bugs to m560x-driver-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..178ef3c5e579
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+                        Soc-Camera Subsystem
+                        ====================
+
+Terminology
+-----------
+
+The following terms are used in this document:
+ - camera / camera device / camera sensor - a video-camera sensor chip, capable
+   of connecting to a variety of systems and interfaces, typically uses i2c for
+   control and configuration, and a parallel or a serial bus for data.
+ - camera host - an interface, to which a camera is connected. Typically a
+   specialised interface, present on many SoCs, e.g., PXA27x and PXA3xx, SuperH,
+   AVR32, i.MX27, i.MX31.
+ - camera host bus - a connection between a camera host and a camera. Can be
+   parallel or serial, consists of data and control lines, e.g., clock, vertical
+   and horizontal synchronization signals.
+
+Purpose of the soc-camera subsystem
+-----------------------------------
+
+The soc-camera subsystem provides a unified API between camera host drivers and
+camera sensor drivers. It implements a V4L2 interface to the user, currently
+only the mmap method is supported.
+
+This subsystem has been written to connect drivers for System-on-Chip (SoC)
+video capture interfaces with drivers for CMOS camera sensor chips to enable
+the reuse of sensor drivers with various hosts. The subsystem has been designed
+to support multiple camera host interfaces and multiple cameras per interface,
+although most applications have only one camera sensor.
+
+Existing drivers
+----------------
+
+As of 2.6.27-rc4 there are two host drivers in the mainline: pxa_camera.c for
+PXA27x SoCs and sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c for SuperH SoCs, and four sensor drivers:
+mt9m001.c, mt9m111.c, mt9v022.c and a generic soc_camera_platform.c driver. This
+list is not supposed to be updated, look for more examples in your tree.
+
+Camera host API
+---------------
+
+A host camera driver is registered using the
+
+soc_camera_host_register(struct soc_camera_host *);
+
+function. The host object can be initialized as follows:
+
+static struct soc_camera_host pxa_soc_camera_host = {
+        .drv_name       = PXA_CAM_DRV_NAME,
+        .ops            = &pxa_soc_camera_host_ops,
+};
+
+All camera host methods are passed in a struct soc_camera_host_ops:
+
+static struct soc_camera_host_ops pxa_soc_camera_host_ops = {
+        .owner          = THIS_MODULE,
+        .add            = pxa_camera_add_device,
+        .remove         = pxa_camera_remove_device,
+        .suspend        = pxa_camera_suspend,
+        .resume         = pxa_camera_resume,
+        .set_fmt_cap    = pxa_camera_set_fmt_cap,
+        .try_fmt_cap    = pxa_camera_try_fmt_cap,
+        .init_videobuf  = pxa_camera_init_videobuf,
+        .reqbufs        = pxa_camera_reqbufs,
+        .poll           = pxa_camera_poll,
+        .querycap       = pxa_camera_querycap,
+        .try_bus_param  = pxa_camera_try_bus_param,
+        .set_bus_param  = pxa_camera_set_bus_param,
+};
+
+.add and .remove methods are called when a sensor is attached to or detached
+from the host, apart from performing host-internal tasks they shall also call
+sensor driver's .init and .release methods respectively. .suspend and .resume
+methods implement host's power-management functionality and its their
+responsibility to call respective sensor's methods. .try_bus_param and
+.set_bus_param are used to negotiate physical connection parameters between the
+host and the sensor. .init_videobuf is called by soc-camera core when a
+video-device is opened, further video-buffer management is implemented completely
+by the specific camera host driver. The rest of the methods are called from
+respective V4L2 operations.
+
+Camera API
+----------
+
+Sensor drivers can use struct soc_camera_link, typically provided by the
+platform, and used to specify to which camera host bus the sensor is connected,
+and arbitrarily provide platform .power and .reset methods for the camera.
+soc_camera_device_register() and soc_camera_device_unregister() functions are
+used to add a sensor driver to or remove one from the system. The registration
+function takes a pointer to struct soc_camera_device as the only parameter.
+This struct can be initialized as follows:
+
+        /* link to driver operations */
+        icd->ops        = &mt9m001_ops;
+        /* link to the underlying physical (e.g., i2c) device */
+        icd->control    = &client->dev;
+        /* window geometry */
+        icd->x_min      = 20;
+        icd->y_min      = 12;
+        icd->x_current  = 20;
+        icd->y_current  = 12;
+        icd->width_min  = 48;
+        icd->width_max  = 1280;
+        icd->height_min = 32;
+        icd->height_max = 1024;
+        icd->y_skip_top = 1;
+        /* camera bus ID, typically obtained from platform data */
+        icd->iface      = icl->bus_id;
+
+struct soc_camera_ops provides .probe and .remove methods, which are called by
+the soc-camera core, when a camera is matched against or removed from a camera
+host bus, .init, .release, .suspend, and .resume are called from the camera host
+driver as discussed above. Other members of this struct provide respective V4L2
+functionality.
+
+struct soc_camera_device also links to an array of struct soc_camera_data_format,
+listing pixel formats, supported by the camera.
+
+--
+Author: Guennadi Liakhovetski <g.liakhovetski@gmx.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6f562f778b28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := slabinfo
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page_migration b/Documentation/vm/page_migration
index 99f89aa10169..d5fdfd34bbaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/page_migration
+++ b/Documentation/vm/page_migration
@@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ migrate_pages function call takes two sets of nodes and moves pages of a
 process that are located on the from nodes to the destination nodes.
 Page migration functions are provided by the numactl package by Andi Kleen
 (a version later than 0.9.3 is required. Get it from
-ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/ak). numactl provided libnuma which
-provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page migration.
-cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the pages of
-a process are located. See also the numa_maps manpage in the numactl package.
+ftp://oss.sgi.com/www/projects/libnuma/download/). numactl provides libnuma
+which provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page
+migration.  cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the
+pages of a process are located. See also the numa_maps documentation in the
+proc(5) man page.
 
 Manual migration is useful if for example the scheduler has relocated
 a process to a processor on a distant node. A batch scheduler or an
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..40e5f46e4740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := watchdog-simple watchdog-test
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dbe3377754af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/x86/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+00-INDEX
+        - this file
+mtrr.txt
+        - how to use x86 Memory Type Range Registers to increase performance
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
index 147bfe511cdd..83c0033ee9e0 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Protocol:	2.00+
 
 Field name:     start_sys
 Type:           read
-Offset/size:    0x20c/4
+Offset/size:    0x20c/2
 Protocol:       2.00+
 
   The load low segment (0x1000).  Obsolete.
diff --git a/Documentation/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
index c39ac395970e..cc071dc333c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtrr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Richard Gooch
   The AMD K6-2 (stepping 8 and above) and K6-3 processors have two
   MTRRs. These are supported.  The AMD Athlon family provide 8 Intel
   style MTRRs.
-  
+
   The Centaur C6 (WinChip) has 8 MCRs, allowing write-combining. These
   are supported.
 
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ reg00: base=0x00000000 (   0MB), size=  64MB: write-back, count=1
 reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=  16MB: write-combining, count=1
 reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size=   4kB: uncachable, count=1
 
-Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area 
+Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area
 excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for
 registers.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
index 17965f927c15..c93ff5f4c0dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
@@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used
 ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached,
 Write-combined and Uncached Minus.
 
+
+PAT APIs
+--------
+
 There are many different APIs in the kernel that allows setting of memory
 attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces
 should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available,
@@ -26,38 +30,38 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing.
 API                    |    RAM   |  ACPI,...  |  Reserved/Holes  |
 -----------------------|----------|------------|------------------|
                        |          |            |                  |
-ioremap                |    --    |    UC      |       UC         |
+ioremap                |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
                        |          |            |                  |
 ioremap_cache          |    --    |    WB      |       WB         |
                        |          |            |                  |
-ioremap_nocache        |    --    |    UC      |       UC         |
+ioremap_nocache        |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
                        |          |            |                  |
 ioremap_wc             |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
                        |          |            |                  |
-set_memory_uc          |    UC    |    --      |       --         |
+set_memory_uc          |    UC-   |    --      |       --         |
  set_memory_wb         |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
 set_memory_wc          |    WC    |    --      |       --         |
  set_memory_wb         |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-pci sysfs resource     |    --    |    --      |       UC         |
+pci sysfs resource     |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
                        |          |            |                  |
 pci sysfs resource_wc  |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
  is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH|          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       UC         |
+pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
  !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
 pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
  PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE  |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    UC      |       UC         |
+/dev/mem               |    --    |  WB/WC/UC- |    WB/WC/UC-     |
  read-write            |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    UC      |       UC         |
+/dev/mem               |    --    |    UC-     |       UC-        |
  mmap SYNC flag        |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |  WB/WC/UC  |    WB/WC/UC      |
+/dev/mem               |    --    |  WB/WC/UC- |    WB/WC/UC-     |
  mmap !SYNC flag       |          |(from exist-|  (from exist-    |
  and                   |          |  ing alias)|    ing alias)    |
  any alias to this area|          |            |                  |
@@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ pci proc               |    --    |    --      |       WC         |
  and                   |          |            |                  |
  MTRR says WB          |          |            |                  |
                        |          |            |                  |
-/dev/mem               |    --    |    --      |    UC_MINUS      |
+/dev/mem               |    --    |    --      |       UC-        |
  mmap !SYNC flag       |          |            |                  |
  no alias to this area |          |            |                  |
  and                   |          |            |                  |
@@ -98,3 +102,35 @@ types.
 
 Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc] to set access type for RAM ranges.
 
+
+PAT debugging
+-------------
+
+With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by
+
+# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
+PAT memtype list:
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
+uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
+uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
+
+This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to
+access those physical address ranges.
+
+Another, more verbose way of getting PAT related debug messages is with
+"debugpat" boot parameter. With this parameter, various debug messages are
+printed to dmesg log.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
index 1894cdfc69d9..1894cdfc69d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/usb-legacy-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
index b0c7b6c4abda..72ffb5373ec7 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ APICs
                  apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
                  broken.
 
-   disable_8254_timer / enable_8254_timer
-                 Enable interrupt 0 timer routing over the 8254 in addition to over
-                 the IO-APIC. The kernel tries to set a sensible default.
-
 Early Console
 
    syntax: earlyprintk=vga
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
index 169ad423a3d1..169ad423a3d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/zero-page.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt